Home

Dodge 2006 HB Durango Automobile User Manual

1. 351 336 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Air Conditioner Maintenance 351 Power Steering Fluid Check 352 Driveline And Steering Component Lubrication i 4 405 i REEF ee fe 353 Body Lubrication 0004 353 Windshield Wiper Blades 354 Windshield Washers leues 354 Exhaust System llle 355 Cooling System ges see d e 355 Hoses And Vacuum Vapor Harnesses 360 Brake System 2 6c eee ns 361 Automatic Transmission ll 363 Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Manual Transmission 0 0 eee eee eee 364 Manual Transmission liess 364 Transfer Case 1 eee ee 365 Front Rear Axle Fluid 0 366 Appearance Care And Protection From CCOFTOSIODU S 4 2 49d Rea Sedat aS ROO 366 ll Fuses Integrated Power Module 371 Bl Replacement Light Bulbs 378 W Bulb Replacement 2222 99 9 eR Ea 379 Head Light 2 eei RR PS 379 Left Front Turn Signal llle 379 Right Front Turn Signal 0 379 Front Side Marker llle 380 Front Fog Light Front Fascia Mounted 380 EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 337 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Bl Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 383 e
2. 334 324 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES BEEEEEEEEEEAMAMAMMMIEECCC HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS E Your vehicle s hazard warning flasher is an emergency warning system When you activate it all front and rear directional signals will flash intermittently Use it when your vehicle is disabled on or near the road It warns other drivers to steer clear of you and your vehicle This is an emergency warning system not to be used when the vehicle is in motion To activate the warning flashers press the button on the lower switch bank below the climate controls To turn the warning flashers off press the button again Hazard Warning Switch NOTE With extended use the flasher may wear down your battery EE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 325 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways Slow down e Incity traffic While stopped put transmission in N Neutral but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature Control to maximum heat the Mode Control to floor and the Fan Control to High This allows the heater co
3. 0000 354 Waxing and Polishing resse sns th Eatonin 367 Wheel Alignment and Balance 284 Wheel and Wheel Trim 0000 368 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 368 Wheel Mounting 0 0 0 0 00a ee 331 Wind Buffeting itani aiaa 35 143 Window Fogging 6 cee eee 232 MWindOWS cud 4 we dase e deett 31 POWGR sata id Due edat e Sue a do adt dene 31 Windshield Defroster 000 76 Windshield Washers lesus 122 354 ic ee ee ere ee ee ee 354 Windshield Wiper Blades 354 Windshield Wipers sssr taisses bacanau det 122 Wiper Rear cec zseck eee ds 155 Wrecker TOWING auem m Re beg redeas 334 YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure 369
4. Speeds 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to4 4to5 5to6 Never hold the vehicle stopped on a hill by using the gine clutch pedal The clutch may be damaged 3 7L Accel 15 24 24 34 47 56 During cold weath ence i A 39 55 76 90 uring cold weather you may experience increase Cruise 10 16 19 27 37 Al effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms 31 43 60 66 up This is normal e Push in the clutch pedal completely when shifting Otherwise transmission or clutch damage may result 246 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Recommended Manual Transmission Downshifting Speeds To prevent clutch and transmission damage your vehicle should be downshifted at speeds no greater than those listed in the chart below Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH KM H Gear 6thto 5thto 4th to 3rd to 2nd to Selec 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st tion Maxi 100 80 mph 60 mph 40 mph 20 mph mum mph 128 96 64 32 Speed 160 km h km h km h km h km h CAUTION Failure to follow the recommended downshifting speeds may cause the engine to over speed and or damage the clutch disc even if the clutch pedal is depressed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 247 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed It is dangerous to shift the selector le
5. 394 SCHEDULE B NENNEN Miles 48 000 51 000 54 000 57 000 60 000 Kilometers 80 000 85 000 90 000 95 000 100 000 Drain and refill the transfer case fluid X Flush and replace the engine coolant anti freeze X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 ee SCHEDULE B 395 Miles 63 000 66 000 69 000 72 000 75 000 Kilometers 105 000 110000 115 000 120 000 125 000 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X replaced at 3 months Rotate the tires X X Inspect the engine air filter element replace if X necessary required if belt was previously replaced Inspect the brake linings X Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary X Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid X Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed Not X M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 396 SCHEDULE B ME Miles 78 000 81 000 84 000 87 000 90 000 Kilometers 130 000 135 000 140 000 145 000 150 000 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X replaced at 3 months Rotate the tires X X X Inspect the engine air filter element replace if X necessary Inspect the PCV Valve and replace if necessary X Repl
6. 0 00000 eee 30 Child Protection llle 30 DOOR 33 312 Ea de OECD wr bue Bede 27 Power DOO ics id sone Ges iw Rak be Bre aes oss anh ER eters 29 Steering Wheel ese scie meth Rt e 16 en INDEX 429 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH lessen 68 69 Lubrication Body 1 6 eee 353 Luggage Carriers sarees a ha t drb aka ee 157 Maintenance Free Battery 351 Maintenance Procedures 00000000 343 Maintenance Schedule Ln 386 Schedule A ees 403 Schedule B i d ee ER 389 Maintenance Schedules 000000005 386 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine xk ass manitas 173 341 Manual Service llle 416 Manual Transmission 243 364 Fluid Level Check 0 00 00 00 ee 364 Lubricant Selection less 364 384 Shift Speeds ques se Sag Eom een 245 Master Cylinder Brakes Mini Trip Computer 000005 175 182 Mirtors x34 k 45450448 v3 e ee eee ad 81 Automatic Dimming 0 0 00 0 0 eae 82 Electric Powered 0 0 0 0 eee ena 83 Outside i22 u bee Eee ER X Ans 82 RGaTVIEW zc keen he xe edere eee ee 81 Vanity oi oa ese ened egeta poteet 84 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 9 Monitor Tire Pressure System 287 Mopar Parts 0 else 342 415 Multi Function Control Lever 119 Navigation Radio 235 exe ed edes 219 Na
7. 296 Bl Trailer Towing 4 0L Engine If Equipped ss coser Common Towing Definitions 306 REFORMS eGR OUNE yaana dis parkas ld Trailer Hitch Classification 310 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 297 Trailer Towing Weights MMT In Gasoline 0 000 298 Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings 310 Materials Added To Fuel 298 Trailer And Tongue Weight 314 Fuel System Cautions 298 Towing Requirements 0 315 238 STARTING AND OPERATING MEM Towing pSr x caos a ie dice ant aid al es 319 Towing 2WD Models 321 li Recreational Towing Towing 4WD Or All Wheel Behind Motorhome Etc 200 321 Drive Models 0 00000 000 eee 321 EN STARTING AND OPERATING 239 STARTING PROCEDURES Manual Transmission Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both Apply the parking brake place the gearshift control lever inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts in N Neutral and depress the clutch pedal before starting vehicle This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system It will not start unless the CAUTION clutch pedal is pressed to the floor Long periods of engine idling especially at high Automatic Transmission engine speeds can cause excessive exhaust tempera Start the engine with the selector
8. To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being dis played To reset all resettable functions press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within 3 seconds of resetting the currently displayed function gt Reset ALL will display during this 3 second window Compass Display The compass readings indicate the direction O the vehicle is facing Press and release the compass button to display one of eight com pass readings and the outside temperature 184 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to set the compass manually When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL message does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Turn on the ignition switch 2 Press the MENU button until Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features menu is reached 3 Press the SCROLL but
9. e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not over load your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chas sis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in P Park With a manual transmission shift the trans mission into R Reverse Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW ee STARTING AND OPERATING 317 3 GAWR Information section of this manual on Tread Wear 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized idicators Jor the proper mepection procedure This requirement may limit the ability to always When replacing tires refer to the Tires General Infor achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a mation section of this manual on Replacement Tires for percentage of total trailer weight proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load
10. 0000 240 Manual Transmission less 239 Remote seca di Sornte sd px essem gon Ra 26 Steering Power jis a od eee s Eus pP wes 268 352 Tilt Colum uu cates a ot owe eee ez 124 Wheel Lock iio Er Gwe se eects 16 Wheels TIE osos guide eta aul eee aps 124 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls isis s e eee dex eae OLOrdge iura d ed ds oe 4 mea RR e e T RE Storage Bin iasceucsa poko os as ads ROS SR das Storage Vehicle sssaaa ereda es Sun ROOL 4 2 XA Uere Subsea ee aa Be Sun Visor Extension llle Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 434 INDEX a System Navigation lese 219 System Remote Starting 000 26 Table Utility cs cem sie ae ee 152 Tachometer 2 566 e m 170 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 164 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 68 Tie Down Hooks Cargo 6 6 eee ee 150 Tilt Steering Column sells 124 TipiStatt isse ee vse tae os eee EE 240 Tire and Loading Information Placard 274 Tire Identification Number TIN 272 Tire Markings x cse e ce x BEES ee 269 Tire Safety Information llle 269 ic 76 278 417 Ar Pressure xs ves Urn as bie ace aos an mate dU 279 Alignment and Balance 284 Chains dede tout renes iens 285 Changing 445 0 f4edh dadtne P RECERE i Rn eas 326 General Information 00005 278 High Speed iio RE E aed RP 281 Inflation Pre
11. If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis tance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident Towing Requirements Trailer Lights amp Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector STARTING AND OPERATING 319 NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness RUNNING BATTERY The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle LAMPS r but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector BACK nas LAMPS Refer to the following illustrations LH STOP RH TURN STOP TURN STOP TURN ELECTRIC 5 LEFT FEMALE GROUND BRAKES STOP TURN s PINS 812634c6 PARK 7 Pin Connector Towing Tips GND MALE PIN Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy 813426206 traffic 4 Pin Connector 320 STARTING AND OPERATING ME If using a manual transmission vehic
12. 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Class I Light Duty Class II Medium Duty Class III Heavy Duty 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra Heavy Duty 10 000 Ibs 4 540 kg All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain EE STARTING AND OPERATING 311 Engine Transmission Model GCWR Gross Com bined Wt Rating Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Tongue Wt See Note 3 7L 6 Speed Manual 4x2 8 500 Ibs 3 855 kg 40 Sq Ft 3 72 square meters 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg 350 Ibs 159 kg 3 7L 6 Speed Manual 4x4 8 750 Ibs 3 969 kg 40 Sq Ft 3 72 square meters 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg 350 Ibs 159 kg 3 7L Automatic 4x2 7 150 Ibs 3 243 kg 32 Sq Ft 2 97 square meters 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 200 Ibs 91 kg 3 7L Automatic 4x4 7 400 Ibs 3 356 kg 32 Sq Ft 2 97 square meters 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 200 Ibs 91 kg 3 7L Automatic w Cooler 4x2 9 850 Ibs 4 468 kg 64 Sq Ft 5 94 square meters 3 500 Ibs 1 588 kg 350 Ibs 159 kg 3 7L Automatic w Cooler 4 0L Automatic 4x4 4x2 10 100 Ibs 4 581 kg 7 150 Ibs 3 243 kg 64 Sq Ft 5 94 square meters 32 Sq Ft
13. 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 19 5 Gallons 73 8 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 3 7 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified Engine Oil 5 Qts 4 7 Liters 4 0 Liter Engine SAE 10W 30 API Certified Engine Oil 6 Ots 5 7 Liters Cooling System 3 7 Liter Engine Mopar Antifreeze Engine Coolant 5 Year 14 Qts 13 Liters 100 000 Mile Formula 4 0 Liter Engine Mopar Antifreeze Engine Coolant 5 Year 14 Qts 13 Liters 100 000 Mile Formula Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Engine Coolant Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Or ganic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil 3 7L Engine Use SAE 5W 20 API Certified meeting material standard MS 6395 or equiva lent Engine Oil 4 0L Engine Use SAE 10W 30 API Certified meeting material standard MS 6395 or equivalent Mopar Engine Oil Filter P N 5281090 or equivalent Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine com artment 87 Octane R M 2 Method 87 Octane R M 2 Method Acceptable 89 Octane R M 2 Method Pre ferred Engine Oil Filter Spark Plugs Fuel Selection 3 7L Engines Fuel Selection 4 0L Engines 384 MAINTAINING YO
14. Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the UConnect system Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Working with Automated Systems This method is designed to be used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated tele phone system You can use your UConnect system to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as paging service or automated customer service Some services require immediate response selection in some instances that may be too quick for use of UConnect system When calling a number with your UConnect system that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can push the Voice Recognition button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your pin number followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the Voice Recognition button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used to navigate through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you w
15. e Maintain antifreeze coolant concentration at 50 HOAT antifreeze coolant minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components e Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean also e Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory cooling performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Hoses and Vacuum Vapor Harnesses Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of heat and mechanical damage Hard or soft spots brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasions and exces sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber Pay particular attention to the hoses nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect hose rout ing to be sure hoses do not touch any heat source or moving component that may cause heat damage or mechanical wear Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or collapsed Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361 are present Components should be replaced immedi ately if there is any evidence of degradation that c
16. necessary required if belt was previously replaced Inspect the brake linings X Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid X Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary X Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed Not X en SCHEDULE B 401 Miles 138 000 141 000 144 000 147 000 150 000 Kilometers 230 000 235 000 240 000 245 000 250 000 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X replaced at 3 months Rotate the tires X X Inspect the engine air filter element replace if X necessary not done at 120 000 miles 200 000 km Inspect the PCV Valve and replace if necessary X Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Only X Inspect the brake linings X Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid X Inspect the manual transmission fluid add as nec X essary 3 7L Only Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary X Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed Not X required if belt was previously replaced Flush and replace the engine coolant anti freeze if X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 402 SCHEDULE B ME Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected Retain all re ceipts t Applies only if vehicle is used for frequent trai
17. ous injury or death ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 1 Turn off the engine 2 Erase the factory test codes by pressing the two outside buttons Release the buttons when the light in the Universal Transceiver begins to flash about 20 seconds NOTE Do not repeat Step 2 to program additional hand held transmitters 3 Choose one of the three Universal Transceiver buttons to program Place the hand held controller one to three inches from the Universal Transceiver while keeping its indicator light in view HomeLink Buttons 4 Using both hands press the hand held transmitter button and the desired Universal Transceiver button Do not release the buttons until step 5 has been completed NOTE Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to replace step 4 with the procedures listed under Canadian Programming 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 5 The indicator light in the Universal Transceiver will begin to flash first slowly and then rapidly The rapid flashing indicates successful programming If after 90 seconds the indicator light does not flash rapidly or goes out return to step 1 and repeat the procedure To train the other buttons repeat steps 3 and 4 Be sure to keep your hand held transmitters in case you need to retrain the Universal Transceiver NOTE If you do not successfully program the Uni versal Transceiver to learn the signal of your hand held transmi
18. Cargo Area Features Cargo Compartment Eight 22e eee Rm Ree bum e 422 INDEX BEEN Cargo Liglib urhe Inge eer Spi Rd get By id 150 Cargo Load Floor 4522 9k R3 151 Cargo Slide Out System Load N Go ces o p emm 153 Cargo Tie Downs 0 eee ee eee 150 Catalytic Convert t ccs selected 348 CD Compact Disc Player Maintenance 227 Cellular Phone 42 2 RR aeg 84 Center High Mounted Stop Light 381 Certification Label isse ERE 303 Changing A Flat Tire 000050 326 Charging ac puce ete eus dO me AR oe ess 332 Chart Tire Sizing x iue Pie ee RES ee oe 270 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 341 Checks Safety cese Rex Rex Bas 75 76 Child Restraint ee er eteesi kemsa 64 65 69 72 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 68 69 Child Safety Locks lt is eee RE 30 Climate Control is iano e ers Rer Re a ate 228 Clock saeua e t ex rn ter TRENT 193 208 219 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 227 Compass ai ce Pei eee Da pma a a 175 178 183 Compass Calibration 0 178 184 Compass Variance 0 0002s ee 177 184 Computer Trip Travel 040 182 Console x coi eos oH eae ea a 149 Console Floor 0 0 0 0 eee 149 Contract Service llle 414 Converter Catalytic 348 Cooling System 1 6 eee 355 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 357 Coolant Capacity llle 382 Coolant
19. D U L E S 8 nn SCHEDULE A 405 M A Miles 60 000 66 000 72 000 78 000 e Kilometers 100000 110000 120 000 130 000 M Months 60 66 72 78 N Change the engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X 4 Rotate the tires X X X X C Inspect the engine air filter element and replace if necessary X E Inspect the PCV Valve and replace if necessary X S Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Only X Inspect the brake linings X E Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed X 1 Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed Not required if X L belt was previously replaced E Flush and replace the engine coolant anti freeze Where both X 3 time and mileage are indicated follow the interval which oc 8 curs first Inspect the manual transmission fluid add as necessary 3 7L X Only Inspect transfer case fluid add as necessary X H 406 SCHEDULE A EE Miles 84 000 90 000 96 000 102 000 IE Kilometers 140 000 150000 160000 170 000 Xe Months 84 90 96 102 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X H Rotate the tires X X X X 3 Inspect the engine air filter element and replace if nec X tg essary IM Inspect the PCV Valve and replace if necessary X B Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Only X ME Replace the spark plugs 4 0L Only X 1 Inspect the timing be
20. EE STARTING AND OPERATING 293 NOTE Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI kPA or BAR 81825bed NOTE A low spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the low tire s that is flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value The system will automatically update the graphic display of the pressure value s will stop flash ing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressure s have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information Check TPM System Message S The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will rf flash on and off for 60 seconds and an audible chime will sound when a system fault is detected The flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes without an audible chime until the fault condition no longer exists The EVIC will display the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for 3 seconds This text message is then followed 2904 STARTING AND OPERATING ME by a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sen sor s is not being received NOTE Your system can be set to display pressure units i
21. Neutral can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Section 5 and Towing a Disabled Vehicle in Section 6 of this manual D Drive The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth gear The D Drive position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions Electronic Range Select ERS Operation The Electronic Range Select ERS shift control allows you to move the shifter left or right when the shifter is in the D Drive position allowing the selection EE STARTING AND OPERATING 257 of the desired top gear For example if the driver shifts the transmission into 3 third gear the transmission will never shift above third gear but can shift down to 2 second or 1 first when needed WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid Screen Display 1 2 3 4 D Actual Gear s Al 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 lowed NOTE To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration engine braking move the shift lever to the left D and hold it there The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down Overdrive Operation The overdrive automatic transmission contains an elec tronically controlled 5th speed Overdrive The trans mission will automatically shift from 4th gear to
22. The nut is located under a plastic cover at the center rear of the cargo floor area just inside the liftgate opening WARNING Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down Impact type tools can damage the winch mechanism Lowering Raising Spare Tire 328 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EBENEN Spare Tire Removal Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut Use the Lug Wrench to rotate the nut counter clockwise until the spare is on the ground with enough slack in the cable to allow to pull the tire out from under the vehicle CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack extension tube only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch When the spare is clear tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the center of the wheel Preparations For Jacking Park the vehicle on a firm level surface avoid ice or slippery areas set the parking brake and place the gear selector in P Park Turn OFF the ignition WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel e Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher e Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally oppo site of the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel e Passengers shoul
23. Tire Sizing Chart e Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High Flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary Spare tire E STARTING AND OPERATING 271 EXAMPLE 31 Overall Diameter in Inches in 215 Section Width in Millimeters mm 65 Aspect Ratio in Percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section Width in Inches in R Construction Code R means Radial Construction D means Diagonal or Bias Construction 15 Rim Diameter in Inches in Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions 272 STARTING AND OPERATING BEEN EXAMPLE The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should on
24. U L E S 8 392 SCHEDULE B ME Miles 33 000 36 000 39 000 42 000 45 000 Kilometers 55 000 60 000 65 000 70000 75 000 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X replaced at 3 months Rotate the tires X X Inspect the engine air filter element replace if X necessary Inspect the brake linings X Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid X Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary X Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed X en SCHEDULE B 393 Inspect the PCV Valve and replace if necessary Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Only Miles 48 000 51 000 54 000 57 000 60 000 Kilometers 80 000 85 000 90 000 95 000 100 000 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X replaced at 3 months Rotate the tires X X X Inspect the engine air filter element replace if X necessary Inspect the brake linings Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid Inspect manual transmission fluid add as neces sary 3 7L Only X lt gt lt gt lt OX Drain and refill the automatic transmission fluid Replace main sump filter and spin on cooler return filter if equipped gt x lt Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed Not required if belt was previously M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8
25. check for a defective bulb If either indicator fails to light up when the lever is moved check for a defective turn signal LED A single chime is activated when the left right turn signal is left on with the engine RPM vehicle speed greater than 15 mph 24 km h for more than one mile 13 Transmission Temperature Warning Light If Equipped This light indicates that there is excessive trans mission fluid temperature that might occur with severe usage such as trailer towing If this light comes on stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the transmission in N Neutral until the light goes off 14 Brake Warning Light The red BRAKE warning light will come on when the ignition key is first turned on and stay on briefly as a 168 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS bulb check If the bulb does not come on during starting see your authorized dealer for service If the light stays on it may be an indication that the parking brake has not been released or there is a low brake fluid level If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or a problem with the Brake Booster In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake Booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake If the parking brake is
26. could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press down on the lever and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pulling the speed control lever towards you CANCEL or normal brake or clutch pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate speed control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning off the ignition switch erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RESUME ACCEL lever up and release Resume can be used at any speed above 25 mph 40 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the speed control is ON speed can be increased by pushing up and holding RESUME ACCEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed increase Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 6 km h etc To decrease speed while speed control is ON push down and hold SET DECEL Release the lever when the desired spe
27. have the condi tion investigated promptly If this light comes on and remains on while driving it suggests a potential engine control problem and the need for system service Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your dealer for service as soon as possible 174 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Ses CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and driveability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required 28 Cruise Indicator Light If Equipped This indicator lights when the electronic speed control system is turned on 29 Odometer Trip Odometer Reset Button Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings When the trip odometer is displayed press once for Trip A and press again for Trip B If the instrument cluster is a base cluster no separate compass temperature display press the button a third time for outside Ambient Temperature on the odometer display Press and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilome ters The odometer must be in trip mode to reset Press this button to view the compass display if equipped Refer to Compass Trip Computer in this section 30 Compass Trip Computer or Electronic Vehicle Information Cent
28. 05 367 Power Distribution Center Fuses 371 OOF Locks 45 asa weavers ged RC ORC We a 29 lnvertef serro caede ari ea ed eda eR ESS 146 MVAETOLS 3 erp Bras Ep ENCORE RU bi E ets 83 Dleering o pude ET uh eb ede 268 352 en INDEX 431 SUNTOOE zs ERR enPe n eR nee x TERR ats 141 Windows 22x dm dx e508 31 Power Steering Fluid 0 384 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 45 Preparation for Jacking 04 328 Pretensioners Seat Belts s data Sal eux Ere gO 44 Programmable Electronic Features 136 140 188 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 24 136 140 Radial Ply Tires 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee 281 Radio Broadcast Signals 04 191 Radio Navigation 2i acad ue anpra 219 Radio Satellite llle 219221 Rear Axle Differential lesen 366 Rear Window Defroster 00 156 Rear Window Features isses 155 Rear Wiper Washer isses 155 Rearview Mirrors else Ree RE RES eR ens 81 Reclining Front Seats 111 Recorder Event Data llle 61 Recreational Towing 0 0 00 00a ee 321 Reformulated Gasoline 0050 297 Refrigerdnt si ee 9e eR ERR RE ES eb des 352 Release Hood 0 00 ee eaii 117 Reminder Lights On 000050 120 Reminder Seat Belt 0 00 00 sees 44 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 21 Remote Sound
29. 2 97 square meters 3 500 Ibs 1 588 kg 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 350 Ibs 159 kg 200 Ibs 91 kg 312 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 4 0L 4x4 7 400 lbs 3 356 kg 32 Sq Ft 2 97 2 000 lbs 907 kg 200 Ibs 91 kg Automatic square meters 4 0L 4x2 9 850 lbs 4 468 kg 64 Sq Ft 5 94 3 500 Ibs 1 588 kg 350 lbs 159 kg Automatic w square meters Cooler 4 0L 4x4 10 100 Ibs 4 581 kg 64 Sq Ft 5 94 3 500 Ibs 1 588 kg 350 lbs 159 kg Automatic w square meters Cooler Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire kg and Loading Information placard Refer to the Tire Safety Information section in this manual When Towing Trailers with Gross Trailer Weight GTW between 3 500 lbs 1 588 kg and 5 000 Ibs 2 268 The following chart provides maximum trailer weight ratings towable for the following engine transmission combinations ONLY if using a weight distributing hitch EN STARTING AND OPERATING 313 Engine Model GCWR Gross Com Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Tongue Wt See Transmission bined Wt Rating Trailer Wt Note 3 7L 4x2 9 850 lbs 4 468 kg 64 Sq Ft 5 94 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg 500 lbs 227 kg Automatic w square meters Cooler 3
30. 7L 4x4 10 100 Ibs 4 581 kg 64 Sq Ft 5 94 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg 500 lbs 227 kg Automatic square meters w Cooler 4 0L 4x2 9 850 lbs 4 468 kg 64 Sq Ft 5 94 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg 500 lbs 227 kg Automatic w square meters Cooler 4 0L 4x4 10 100 Ibs 4 581 kg 64 Sq Ft 5 94 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg 500 lbs 227 kg Automatic w square meters Cooler Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and and Loading Information placard Refer to the Tire Safety Information section in this manual 314 STARTING AND OPERATING Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch TOW HEIGHT B1546c n Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or
31. AND OPERATING 321 Towing Tips Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time put transmission in neutral and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily refer to Cooling System Operating information in the Maintenance section of this manual for more informa tion RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing 2WD Models Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the driveshaft is removed Towing with the rear wheels on the ground while the driveshaft is connected can result in severe transmission damage Towing 4WD or All Wheel Drive Models Recreational towing is not allowed These models do not have a N Neutral position in the transfer case WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS H Hazard Warning Flashers 324 Preparations For Jacking 328 Milf Your Engine Overheats 325 Jacking Instructions 0004 H Jacking And Tire Changing 326 MiumpStr np 2 2 2 Jack Location 294 942 8744 4005 b Rs 326 W Towing A Disabled Vehicle Spare TireStowage cser 2 2 0 0c eee 327 Two Wheel Drive Vehicles 334 Spare Tire Removal 00 328 Four Wheel Drive Vehicles
32. Air Conditioning Controls 232 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 232 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 352 Air Conditioning System 040 232 Air Filter eci eres ER REX RAS RE 350 Air Pressure Tires llle 279 Airbag Lee eer RETEPRewde Ite 47 170 Airbag Deployment llle 59 Airbag Light ses cce rentada si Masate ns 61 75 Airbag Maintenance 0 0 00 000s eee 61 Alarmi Pani 22 3 x e rw eui ee 23 Alarm Security Alarm 19 166 Alarm System Security Alarm 19 Alignment and Balance 06 284 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 9 Antenna Satellite Radio less 222 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 4 382 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 128 265 Anti Lock Warning Light lise 169 Anti Theft System 0 0 0 eee eee 19 166 Appearance Care ocd e Re CA es 366 Auto Down Power Windows 32 Automatic Dimming Mirror sss 82 Automatic Door Locks 000000000 30 Automatic Transaxle v oreson ee eee 247 Automatic Transmission 249 254 363 Fluid and Filter Changes 363 Fluid Level Check 00 363 364 Fluid Type 22 iae etr Renta 363 384 Gear Ranges a esce rac rep back a ee 249 Special Additiv s 2 05 cage eee ea 364 Torque Converter 000 254 258 en INDEX 421 Autos
33. ESP TCS Indicator Light located in the m instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the ESP Electronic Stability Program cannot prevent tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes the natural laws of physics from acting on the active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator prevailing road conditions ESP cannot prevent acci Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the dents including those resulting from excessive accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful conditions driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others The ESP system has 2 available operating modes in 2WD 4WD Part Time 4WD Full Time and on 2WD vehicles N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 ESP On This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 2WD 4WD Part Time 4WD Full Time and on 2WD vehicles When ever the vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most all driving situations ESP should only be turned off for specific reasons as noted below Partial Of
34. Interior Light CCN INT LIGHT Switch Bank SW BANK Steering Con trol Module SCM 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M SW Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M21 20 Amp Auto Shut Down M27 10 Amp Ignition Switch IGN Yellow ASD 3 Red SW Window Module M22 10 Amp _ Right Horn RT WIN MOD Red HORN HI LOW M28 10 Amp Next Generation Con M23 10 Amp Left Horn LT HORN Red troller NGC Trans Red HI LOW mission Feed TRANS M24 25 Amp Rear Wiper REAR FEED J1962 Natural _ WIPER M29 10 Amp Occupant Classifica M25 20 Amp Fuel Pump FUEL Red tion Module OCM Yellow PUMP Diesel Lift M30 15 Amp Rear Wiper Module Pump DSL LIFT Blue RR WIPER MOD PUMP Export Power Folding Mirror Only PWR FOLD MIR M26 10 Amp Power Mirror Switch M31 20 Amp Back Up Lamps B U Red PWR MIRR SW Yellow LAMPS Driver Window M32 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Switch DRVR WIND Red Controller ORC TT EUROPE ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M33 10 Amp Next Generation Con M37 10 Amp__ Anti Lock Brake Sys Red troller NGC Global Red tem ABS Electronic Powertrain Engine Stability Program Controller GPEC ESP Stop Lamp M34 10 Am
35. Level eis 22s 662s ot eetas 359 Disposal of Used Coolant 358 Drain Flush and Refill 356 Inspection us een eae ddr ore d 355 Points to Remember 00 359 Pressure Cap en INDEX 423 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 356 382 383 Temperature Gauge sl er 164 Corrosion Protection sls 366 Crankcase Emission Control System 350 Cup Holder gt sises se o nn 147 Customer Assistance eee eee 412 Data Recorder Event 2 22 v ei 61 Daytime Running Lights 122 Dealer Service llle 343 Defroster Rear Window 156 Defroster Windshield 76 230 231 Delay Intermittent Wipers 122 Diagnostic System Onboard 340 Dimmer Switch Headlight 120 166 Dipsticks Oil Engine sini eres Ie eR Gh eh ode es 343 Disposal Engine Oil 22 222 RR 9 m daii adiis 346 Used Coolant Antifreeze lesen 358 Door Locks 222 2 e s 27 Door Locks Automatic sees 30 Door Opener Garage dirae iaeaea 134 Drive Belts 0 2 0 0 0 eee eese 347 oap PPP 262 DVD Player Video Entertainment System 225 Electric Remote Mirrors lessen 83 Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet 144 Electrical Power Outlets 00 144 Electronic Brake Control System 128 Electronic Speed Control
36. OFF as long as none of the road tires are below the low pressure warning threshold The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module 292 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e 3 Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings S The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will 4 illuminate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will sound when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low The audible chime will sound once every ignition cycle for each condition that it detects In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display a graphic of the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing
37. OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value EN STARTING AND OPERATING 289 CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equip ment that is not of the same size type and or style After market wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance nor to provide warning of a tire failure or condition e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure 290 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to
38. Over drive if the following conditions are present e the transmission selector is in D Drive e the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem perature vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h transmission has reached normal operating tempera ture NOTE If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem peratures the transmission may not shift into Overdrive and will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature Normal operation will resume when the transmission fluid temperature has 258 STARTING AND OPERATING Se risen to a suitable level Refer also to the Note under torque converter clutch later in this section During cold temperature operation you may notice delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission temperature This feature improves the warm up time of the engine and transmission During cold temperature operation the transmission may not downshift from 2nd 2 gear to 1st 1 gear after the initial 1st 1 to 2nd 2 gear upshift Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored for abnormal condi tions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the transmission limp home mode will be engaged In this mode the transmission will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop To reset the transmission use the following procedure 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Move the shift lever
39. R straint 52 2 Yr lxxv 64 Lr THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 ll Engine Break In Recommendations 74 Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The W Safety Tips oues bare ar ma 74 i ee 76 Exhaust G s ess cae aes eR ewe s 74 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle 2e Res RR RR REPRE A 75 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE xe A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The keys for your new vehicle are enclosed in a plastic bag with the key code number on it If you received your keys without the bag ask your dealer to give you the number The key code can also be obtained by the dealer from your vehicle invoice 81630635 Ignition Key Ignition Key Removal Manual Transmission Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position push the key and cylinder inward rotate the key to the LOCK position and remove the key ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Automatic Transmission If Equipped Place the shift lever in P Park Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position push the key and cylinder inward Ignition Key Positions rotate the key to the LOCK position and remove the key WARNING Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is danger ous for a number of reasons A child or others could be injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the gear selector lever Do not leave the k
40. Radio Mode Pressing the rewind or fast forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Radio Mode Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 195 Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Press the rotary TUNE control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Radio Mode Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for 5 seconds
41. System Radio Controls 226 Remote Starting System 200 26 Replacement Parts 43 eek xen edes 342 Replacement Tires llle 283 Reporting Safety Defects 0 415 Restraint Head lllsleen Restraints Childs eae o Ce qe cei Restraints Occupant Roof Type Carrier 432 INDEX BEEN Rotation Tires llle 286 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 75 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 76 Safety Defects Reporting 415 Safety Information Tire 0 269 Dalety Tips custode a eun gi t dul tie gained why 74 Satellite Radio ee naia a 219221 Satellite Radio Antenna 0000 222 Schedule Maintenance 00005 386 Seat Belt Maintenance 0 0000 cease 75 Seat Belt Reminder esses 44 Seat Bells su aea hoi ede SEED MEUS E Rea 38 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 42 And Pregnant Women 000006 45 Child Restraint 00 00 00 eee 64 72 Extender eee Gee RUE AP A de e 46 Front Seadb ui sd dereud dow aes weds ap en Yi 38 Inspection 23 4284 heh Paseo RR dale RES 75 Maintenance sacs casas mE UR Rb Ea a a 75 370 Pretensioners llle 44 Reminder llle 165 Shoulder Belt Anchorage llis 42 OealS iia bad ed Cave Ede Hea dex V qd 110 Adjustment 2 6 0 0 eee eee 110 Cleaning sss deed dc ced pa ege 369 He
42. The Brake Traction Control System BIC which combines standard ABS and Traction Control provides resistance to any wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque transfer to wheels with traction ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of offroad applications Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional 2 wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover ee STARTING AND OPERATING 263 PARKING BRAKE To set the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as possible When the parking brake is applied with the ignition ON the Brake Warning Light in the instru ment cluster will light To release the parking brake pull up slightly press the center button then lower the lever completely NOTE The instrument cluster Brake Warning Light indicates only that the parking brake is applied You must be sure the parking brake is fully applied before le
43. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a 3 hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres sure molded into the tire side wall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low en STARTING AND OPERATING 281 Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation Radial Ply Tires The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi WARNING tions are such that the vehic
44. This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle The Occupant Classification Module OCM is lo cated beneath the front passenger seat The OCM classifies the occupant into categories based on the measurements made by the seat weight sensors The OCM communicates with the Occupant Restraint Con trol ORC Module The ORC uses the occupant cat egory to determine whether the front passenger airbag should be turned off It also determines the rate of airbag inflation during a collision Your vehicle has four Weight Sensors located between the seat and the floor pan The weight sensors measure applied weight and transfers that information to the OCM ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 e The Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbags are de signed to activate only in certain side collisions When the ORC detects a collision requiring the side curtain airbag to inflate it signals the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflat ing side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner
45. Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and indicates the Month Day and Hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options trailer tongue weight and cargo The label also specifies maxi mum capacities of front and rear axle systems GAWR Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded 304 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for in creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi cle s GVWR Tire Size The tire size on the Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size
46. begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the UConnect system will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is only supported in the USA ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 NOTE The emergency number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for USA and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area The UConnect system does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UCon nect system to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect system Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE The Towing Assistance number dialed is based on the Country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for USA 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour Towing Assistance cover age details in the Warranty information booklet and on the 24 Hour Towing Assistance Card Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems
47. down when the door is closed the door will lock Therefore make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door Manual Door Locks E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 WARNING Power Door Locks A door lock switch is on each front door panel Press this e For personal security and safety in the event of an switch to lock or unlock the doors accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as 3 well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per sonal injuries and death Power Door Lock Switch If you press the power door lock switch while the key is in the ignition and any front door is open the power 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M locks will not operate This prevents you from acciden tally locking your keys in the vehicle Removing the key or closing the door will allow the locks to operate A chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and a door is open as a reminder to remove the key Automatic Door Locks If this feature is selected your door locks will lock automatically if the vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h and all doors are closed It will reset whenever a door is opened This feature is selectable and ca
48. due to deposits As vehicle mileage builds up the PCV valve and passages may accumulate deposits If a valve is not working properly replace it with a new valve DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CLEAN THE OLD PCV VALVE Check ventilation hose for indication of damage or plugging deposits Replace if necessary Fuel Filter A plugged fuel filter can cause hard starting or limit the speed at which a vehicle can be driven Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank frequent replacement of the fuel filter which is mounted in the fuel tank may be necessary Engine Air Cleaner Filter Under normal driving conditions replace the air filter at the intervals shown on Maintenance Schedule A If however you drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe conditions the filter element should be inspected periodically and replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on Maintenance Schedule B WARNING The air cleaner can provide protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air cleaner unless it is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compart ment before starting the vehicle with the air cleaner removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351 Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required WARNING
49. for the engine in your new vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown in Section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered as a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow the safety tips below e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 garage and nev
50. in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment g 7 I bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved e Comes on for any period of time while driving seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for persons with disabilities contact your authorized dealer Event Data Recorder EDR Do not place or hang any items such as add on video players on the right front In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to passenger seat back The additional weight may cause the Occupant Classifi 2 R cation System to be unable to correctly classify the right front occupant This record up to 5 seconds of specific vehicle data parameters could allow the passenger frontal airbag to inflate when it is not desired n see the following list in an event data recorder prior to You need proper knee impact protection in a collision Do not mount or locate li f airb 1 depl any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee bolsters the moment of air ag dep oyment or near dep oyment It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure and up toa quarter second of high speed deceleration to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M data during and or after air bag deployment or near deployment EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly de
51. in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the BRAKE warning light shows system failure Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type WARNING e Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling point or unidentified as to specification may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking You could have an accident e Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363 Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate the brake fluid as seal damage will result Automatic Transmission Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only manufacturer s recommended trans
52. in the phone book with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phone book accessible only in that language Edit Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing names in the phone book is recom mended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit You will then be asked for the name of the phone book entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work mobile or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phone book entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phone book you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete Entries in the UConnect Phonebook NOTE Editing phone book entries is recommended when vehicle is not in motion e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will t
53. in the rear center seating position Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode How to Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic lock ing mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly automatic locking re tractor feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could i
54. indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the push button with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player EN INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 201 Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the eject button and the push button with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the eject button for 5 seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the
55. is the major feature of FM radio NOTE The radio steering wheel radio controls if equipped and 6 disc CD DVD changer if equipped 192 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned off Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature SALES CODE REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate Los SCG MP2 WHA PUSH ALDIQ SELECT i j TUNE SCRO L REO Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode BiBBrhra NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 193 Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Press the ON VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain
56. killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt However any seat belt system may loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary If the seat belt has a automatic locking retractor it will have a distinctive label Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is all extracted from the retractor Allow the belt to return to the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint Refer to Automatic Locking Mode earlier in this section In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to short
57. lever in the N Neutral tures which can damage your vehicle Do not leave or P Park position Apply the brake before shifting to your vehicle unattended with the engine running any driving range Normal Starting Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is WARNING obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal Turn the key to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the key to the OFF position wait 5 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death 240 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN Tip Start Feature Automatic Transmission Only Do not press the accelerator Turn the ignition key briefly to START position and release it The starter motor will continue to run but will automatically disengage itself when the engine is runnin Ignition Key Positions Extreme Cold Weather below 20 F or 29 C To insure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater available from your dealer is recommended If Engine Fails to Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking
58. loss of antifreeze coolant and to insure that antifreeze coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant reserve tank The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add antifreeze coolant when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based antifreeze coolant is a regu lated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by animals or EE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359 children do not store ethylene glycol based antifreeze coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills im mediately Engine Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating tempera ture the level of the antifreeze coolant in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radia
59. maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPM system will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light S The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will 4 illuminate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low The audible chime will sound once every ignition cycle for each condition that it detects Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer The es STARTING AND OPERATING 291 system will automatically update and the Ti
60. manufacturer s Service Contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s Service Contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about your service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract Na tional Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s Service Contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s Service Contract If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer s Service Contract and you require service after your manufactur er s new vehicle limited warranty expires please refer to your contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased your new vehicle Your dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with your ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 415 WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of DaimlerChrysler s warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are av
61. not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system To Unlock the Doors and Liftgate Press and release the Unlock button on the key fob once to unlock only the driver s door or twice to unlock all the doors and liftgate When the Unlock button is pressed the illuminated entry will initiate and the parking lights will flash on twice Remote Unlock Driver s Door First The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors or driver s door only upon the first Unlock button press by using the following procedure 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se On electronic vehicle information center EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Remote Unlock Driver s Door 1st under Personal Settings in the EVIC section Sec tion 4 of this manual On non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the following steps 1 Perform this operation while standing outside the vehicle 2 Press and hold the Lock button on your key fob 3 Continue to hold the Lock button at least 4 seconds but not longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the Unlock button while still holding the Lock button 4 Release both buttons at the same time 5 This will allow you to unlock all doors on the first press of the Unlock button To Lock the Doors and Liftgate Press and release the Lock button on the key fob to lock all doors and liftgate If the ignition is OFF when the doors are locked the parking lights will fla
62. on the Music Type mode for 5 seconds Pressing the Music Type button or turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type informa tion Toggle the Music Type button to select the following format types Program Type 16 m Dis No program type or un in None Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Country Foreign Language Language Information Inform Jazz Jazz News News Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies Personality Persnlty Public Public es INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 211 Rhythm and Blues R amp B Religious Music Rel Musc Religious Talk Rel Talk Rock Rock Soft Soft Soft Rock Soft Rck Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Sports Sports Talk Talk Top 40 Top 40 Weather Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT
63. out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 31 2 inches 9 cm thick when it is inflated The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position every one for the best interaction with the front airbag 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee The front passenger seat assembly contains critical com ponents that affect the front passenger airbag deploy ment Correctly functioning front passenger seat compo nents are critical for the Occupant Classification System OCS to properly classify the front passenger and calcu late the proper airbag deployment Do not make any modifications to the front passenger seat components assembly or to the seat cover The following requirements must be strictly adhered to e Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or components in any way e Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not designated for the specific model being repaired Al ways use the correct seat cover specified for the vehicle e Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat cover e Do not add a secondary seat cover ot
64. road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM can not prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others ESP Electronic Stability Program This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESP cor rects for over under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter acting the over under steer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESP applies the brake of the appropri ate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ESP TCS Indicator Light WARNING The
65. short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision which includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times to reduce or prevent injuries 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Lap Shoulder Belts WARNING All seating positions in your vehicle have combination lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is de e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat signed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions belts are designed to go around the large bones of This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move your body These are the strongest parts of your freely with you under normal conditions But in a colli body and can take the forces of a collision the sion the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instruc tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep you
66. similar object to press the hour H or minute M buttons on the radio The Setup screen appears Setting the Clock 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON or ACC position Using the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object press 220 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME either the H button on the faceplate to change the hour or the M button on the faceplate to change the minute 2 The time setting will increase each time you press the button Holding either button in will fast forward the setting 3 If no changes are made within 5 seconds of accessing the Setup screen the screen will time out and you will be taken to the last mode NOTE To reset the clock select the appropriate time zone and press ENTER The clock will revert to the accurate time based on the time zone you selected Changing the Time Zone 1 Highlight Clock Setup and press ENTER 2 At the Clock Setup screen highlight the box next to Time Zone and press ENTER 3 Highlight the appropriate time zone for you location and press ENTER to store your selection Select Done when finished NOTE When you are traveling and enter a new time zone the cluck must be reset manually for the new zone Changing Daylight Savings Time 1 Highlight the box next to Time and press ENTER 2 Select Daylight Savings when Daylight Savings Time is in effect or Select Standard if Daylight Savings Time is not being observed press ENTER 3 Select Done when finis
67. spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading sec tion of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWR s for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWR s vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to the Vehicle Loading section of this manual To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage lo
68. stop of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ee STARTING AND OPERATING 267 e Do not ride the brakes by resting your foot on the CAUTION pedal This could overheat the brakes and result in The Anti Lock Brake System is subject to possible detrimental effects of electronic interference caused by improperly installed after market radios or tele unpredictable braking action longer stopping dis tances or brake damage When descending mountains or hills repeated brak phones ing can cause brake fade with loss of braking control Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission or locking out overdrive whenever pos NOTE During severe braking conditions a pulsing sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard sible This is normal indicating that the Anti Lock Brake System is functioning WARNING e Engines may idle at higher speeds during warm up which could cause rear wheels to spin and result in loss of vehicle control Be especially careful while driving on slippery roads in close qu
69. teer Ane x takaa krs 350 Engine Oll ac cece e ER RR RR 346 383 Finish Care uobis RR RO wae ROS 367 Flashers Hazard Warning tsa cres ar eis ees 324 Tuin Signal 54 mm bwin eed ss 167 379 381 nn INDEX 425 Flooded Engine Starting 240 Flid Brake 4022 824 123 Sued aed I RRESaS 384 Fluid Capacities ges ecca sgen d edge ahs 382 Fluid Leaks s iue Re aie ae Be Y ax 76 Fluid Level Checks 0000000 366 Automatic Transmission s 363 Engine Of p cic e eae en 343 Manual Transmission 364 Power Steering ia osque oa tind Pues e pas 352 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 383 Fog Light Service sse n m 380 Fog Lights cR ad 121 380 Folding Rear Seat ide SEGUE es 115 Four Wheel Drive llle 259 OperatOn erer eresi Peg pu sa gota e idis 259 SYSTEMS ssa cr ced cad ecole Bead doe 259 Four Wheel Drive Operation 259 Four Way Hazard Flasher 324 Front Axle Differential Fuel g stg eos EDU ue SO ER EU ER DEM 296 Filler Cap Gas Cap scci mr Rs 300 Pulte ware nad ae reos Radon Bo 350 Gasoline usce ERR Ck RR 296 GAuBe duas ek Barer RUE pad eios gus 164 Materials Added 0000 298 Octane Rating 0 0 eee eee 296 383 Requirements soa Taiere sse 382 Tank Capacity cascos aes ke Re Y was i 382 Fuel System Caution lesus 298 301 302 Fus sS 212i gi ai Se Rag EUG Eee Ex E 37
70. that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over front and rear axle Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front EN STARTING AND OPERATING 305 or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distributions can have an a
71. the engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again ee STARTING AND OPERATING 241 WARNING WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel serious personal injury could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly Refer to Section 6 of this manual for proper jump starting procedures and follow them carefully If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key is 242 STARTING AND OPERATING EE CAUTION Long periods of engine idling especially at high released If this occurs continue cranking with the accel erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running smoothly If the engine shows no s
72. the seat and be sure the latch engages fully Manual Seat Adjustment Using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 To adjust the seatback lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat lean back and release the lever Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the at the desired position To return the seatback lift the seat belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Seatback Release Lever 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN 6 Way Driver s Power Seat with Manual Recliner This seat also has a manual recline lever located just to the rear of the power seat switch Pull up on the lever to recline the seat The seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat near the floor Use this switch to move the seat up or down Power Seat Switches E UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat Head Restraints The front passenger seat can be folded fla
73. to right or left index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull left or right Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having Alignment will not correct this problem See your autho adequate speed capability can result in sudden rized dealer for proper diagnosis tire failure and loss of vehicle control EE STARTING AND OPERATING 285 Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out of CAUTION balance Proper balancing will reduce vibration and To avoid damage to your vehicle tires or chains observe avoid tire cupping and spotty wear the following precautions e Because of limited chain clearance between tires and TIRE CHAINS other suspension components it is important that only Use Class S chains or other traction aids that meet SAE chains in good condition are used Broken chains can cause serious vehicle damage Stop the vehicle immedi ately if noise occurs that could suggest chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use Install chains as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 1 2 mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 45 mph 72 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on me
74. to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The vehicle identification number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel area visible through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehicle registration and title Vehicle Identification Number NOTE It is illegal to remove the VIN en INTRODUCTION 9 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its road worthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E A Word About Your Keys 005 Ignition Key Removal Key In Ignition Reminder H Steering Wheel Lock If Equipped To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel To Release The Steering Wheel Lock E Sentry Key If Equipped Replacement Keys 0 000000005 Customer Key Programming General Information sees 19 E Security Alarm System If Equipped 19 To Set The Alarm 0 0 00 eee 19 To Disarm The System 0 20 Bi Iluminated Entry 1 2 eoe a 20 Bl Remote Keyless Entr
75. tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press SCAN a second time INFO Button Radio Mode Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will be displayed In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 194 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Ses 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE control knob 3 After the hours are adjusted press the right side TUNE control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE control knob Press the TUNE control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 RW FF
76. upward loads This is espe cially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle WARNING Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in personal injury or property damage Follow the roof rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS CONTENTS Bl Instrument Panel And Controls Wi Instrument Cluster 0 0 0000 B Instrument Cluster Description lll Compass And Trip Computer If Equipped Control Buttons i c eR Trip GOD ioris a Sige ce pentes Compass Temperature Display E Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped co srie te cess sienas Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays llle Trip Functions Compass Display sess 183 Telephone If Equipped 186 Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features 188 li Radio General Information 191 Radio Broadcast Signals 191 Two Types Of Signals 0 191 160 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Ses Electrical Disturbances AM Reception FM Reception lll Sales Code REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD
77. want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an ap pointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized Chrysler Dodge or Jeep dealer We strongly recommend that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer They know you and your vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s dealers have the facilities factory trained E F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 413 technicians special tools and the latest information to assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to your dealer s service manager first Most matters can be resolved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the dealership They want to know if you need assistance e If your dealership is unable to resolve t
78. your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale WARNING If the gross trailer weight GTW is 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg or more it is mandatory to use a weight distributing hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle If you use a standard weight carrying hitch you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The gross combination weight rating GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Note that GCWR ratings in clude a 150 Ibs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver ee STARTING AND OPERATING 307 Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control
79. 0 000 185 000 190 000 195 000 200 000 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X replaced at 3 months Rotate the tires X X X Inspect the engine air filter element replace if X necessary Inspect the brake linings Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid Inspect the manual transmission fluid add as nec essary 3 7L Only gt x lt lt gt lt gt lt OX Drain and refill the automatic transmission fluid Replace main sump filter and spin on cooler return filter if equipped gt x lt Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed Not required if belt was previously replaced ee SCHEDULE B 399 Miles 108 000 111 000 114 000 117 000 120 000 Kilometers 180 000 185000 190 000 195 000 200 000 Drain and refill the transfer case fluid X Flush and replace the engine coolant anti freeze if X not replaced at 102 000 miles 170 000 km M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 400 SCHEDULE B NENNEN Miles 123 000 126 000 129 000 132 000 135 000 Kilometers 205 000 210 000 215 000 220 000 225 000 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X replaced at 3 months Rotate the tires X X Inspect the engine air filter element replace if X
80. 1 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 134 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap Gas Gauge Fuel Gauge 00 Gasoline Fuel 4 22 RR RR Gasoline Reformulated Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 420 INDEX MM Gauges Coolant Temperature 000 164 BUCH sive i hal ue KR AS ede Sowa ae 164 Odometet ever es eS ere eae re 172 Speedometer 00 000000008 166 Tachometer wa ihe aa se oh eee oe tae 170 Gear Ranges 000000000 245 249 255 General Information 0 005 5 19 295 Glass Cleaning cis orden x hae neo whee 370 Gross Axle Weight Rating 307 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 306 GVWR ugs hs TON er RES 303 Hands Free Phone UConnect 84 Hazard Warning Flasher 324 Head Restraints 0 tra rost ENEE eee 113 Head Rests 222 soils me es 113 Headlights Bulb Replacement 04 379 Dimmer Switch llle 120 Replacing i 4 004 RE enira nites 379 SWILGD ecce toa ee ede ut mat aa Se 120 Heated Seats ssa via v abc RE VR es 113 Heater Engine Block 00000050 243 High Beam Indicator 0 00040 166 Hitches Trailer Towing seem em 3 aes 310 Holder CUP 5 S seudse reperisse Grin ay ses 147 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 134 Hood Release lesen 117 Hoses surnet esta XE wo he e C eue 360 361 Hydraulic
81. 143 ESP BAS Warning Lamp 134 Venting Sunroof Express 143 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Sunshade Operation gcse ac tecst terkis 143 Cargo Light 5 0 qa areke were ER i a n 150 Wind Buffeting co es b ox recap ers 143 Cargo Tie Down Hooks 150 Sunroof Maintenance 005 144 Cargo Load Floor If Equipped 151 H Electrical Power Outlet azur n e RR 144 Utility Table If Equipped ias xen 5 152 Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off 145 Rear Cargo Slide Out System Load N Go If Mi Power Inverter 2 RR 146 EPR ESE sa eas eva A sine qiias me W Cup Holders 2 0 6 cece eee eeee eevee j47 WB Rear Window Features 4 5 155 deno nk we do X X 148 Ree Window Nep WNesneh HC UAD pn aue ao Front Storage Compartment 148 Rear Mindon Debster cs EQUIP DOM ss si me Console Storage Compartment 149 mi Root Lugsape noes IU PQUIDpSd stiaigs sna ur la Cargo Area Featines coe RE Rmo 150 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 MIRRORS A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and Inside Day Night Mirror vertical adjustment of the mirror The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the through the rear window sm
82. 3 Mist Feature 6 0 6 eee eee 123 B Tilt Steering Column oc canoe e ee wees 124 lll Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 125 To Activate eade di iA kg DER eR 63 125 en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79 To Set At A Desired Speed 1206 W Garage Door Opener If Equipped 134 To Deactivate 6 6 eee 126 Programming The Universal Transceiver To Resume Speed 0 00 00 0000 126 Rolling Code Programming To Vary The Speed Setting 126 Canadian Programming Gate Programming Manual Transmission less 127 Op ration scs aie go oe ve ee he Eee tes a aes To Accelerate For Passing 127 Reprogramming A Single Button 140 li Electronic Brake Control System 128 DOCU s Lade races ese v aed bee see edes 140 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 128 W Power Sunroof If Equipped 141 TCS Traction Control System 129 Opening Sunroof Express 142 BAS Brake Assist System 129 Closing Sunroof Express 142 ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation 130 Pinch Protect Feature 00 0 142 ESP Electronic Stability Program 131 Pinch Protect Override 0
83. 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the World Wide Web at e www techauthority daimlerchrysler com e www daimlerchrysler ca manuals DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following describes the tire grading categories estab lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis tration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your car All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety Requirements in Addition to These Grades Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con ditions on a specified government test course For ex ample a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction Grades The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions 418 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WAR
84. Air is directed through the floor defrost and side up window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield i Defrost QU Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum fan and temperature Hot settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the fan switch is not in the A C position This dehumidi fies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 231 Circulation Control Press the mode control knob to activate the recirculation mode A lamp in the knob will illuminate when you are in recirculate mode Press the knob again to deactivate the system Only use the recircu lation mode to temporarily sig Plock out any outside odors smoke or dust and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid weather NOTE Continuous use of the recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended In cold or damp weather the use of the recirculation mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because of 232 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CO
85. BAS is deactivated 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING BAS Brake Assist System cannot prevent the natu ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions BAS cannot prevent accidents in cluding those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it applies the appropriate brake and may reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneu vers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It can not prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading
86. Battery posts terminals and related accessories con tain lead and lead compounds Always wash hands after handling the battery CAUTION It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive and negative and identified on the battery case Also if a fast charger is used while battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables be fore connecting the charger to battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time 352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN WARNING Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information Book for additional warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of persona
87. CK Rotate the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turn ing the control switch If the vehicle is stopped the ignition key must be in the ON position with the engine either RUNNING or OFF This shift cannot be completed if the key is in the accessory position NOTE The 4x4 system will not allow shifts between 2WD 4WD LOCK if the front and or rear wheels are spinning no traction In this situation the 4WD Indicator Light located in the display under the tachom eter will flash At this time reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift 262 STARTING AND OPERATING MEM NOTE Delayed shifting out of 4WD LOCK may be experienced due to uneven tire wear low tire pressure or excessive loading MP 140 Single Speed Full Time Transfer Case If Equipped Operating Information Precautions The MP 140 is a single speed HI range only transfer case which provides convenient full time all wheel drive No driver interaction is required This transfer case employs an inter axle differential that divides engine torque al most evenly with 48 percent torque to the front axle and 52 percent torque to the rear axle this allows the front and rear wheels to rotate at different speeds on all road surfaces
88. Changer MP3 WMA Aux Jack Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files List Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play Info Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play lll Sales Code RES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 Aux Jack Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play H Sales Code RER AM FM CD DVD Radio With Navigation System If Equipped Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Clock Setting Procedure li Satellite Radio If Equipped System Activation EN INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 161 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification ll Remote Sound System Controls Number ENS SID 00000 221 If Equipped siis me mnm es 226 Selecting Satellite Mode RSC Radios 222 Radio Operation s essere see teea ees 227 Satellite Antenna os ciare euie ses 222 CD Player agnosis napana pia ase eie 227 Reception Quality lt e 622 eroe rn 222 MCD DVD Disc Maintenance 2i 227 Operating Instructions Satellite Mode 22 WiClimate Controls Operating
89. Clutch Fluid lees 364 IpnitOn 4 62 ep oae ome Run eh hee 14 Key ais seas ipa CR pec candor dats ROADS CR d a RR we 14 Ignition Key Removal lessen 14 Illuminated Entry i seas mech ma 20 Infant Restraint 0 0 0 0 0c eee eee 64 65 en INDEX 427 Inflation Pressure Tires llle 279 Information Center Vehicle LL 179 Inside Rearview Mirror sess 81 Instrument Cluster 00 000 0005 163 164 Instrument Panel and Controls 162 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 370 Integrated Power Module Fuses 371 Interior Appearance Care 0005 369 Interior Lights 0000 119 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 122 Introduction cecs isse i ova RR E 4 Inverter POW E sass 6 pta ba ae ER eee PS 146 Jack Locatior 45 4 esce drei Bom a gow a CRT des 326 Jack Operation 0 0 000000000 326 329 Jacking Instructions as dessina Seans amaia 329 Key Replacement cese peasan a sk Ronan cella 17 Key Sentry Immobilizer 0 16 K y In Reminder 4 secodre as E mans 16 Keyless Entry System llle 21 Keys Lane Change and Turn Signals Lap Shoulder Belts LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Lead Free Gasoline Leaks Fluid Life Of Tir S epaite aha A eae TE eG Liftgate co ou me are at Rec Wee OR eos as Lights 242300 i 295 AGE e EROR ace a ee Anti Lock Wa
90. Cruise Control 125 Electronic Stability Program ESP 131 166 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 179 Emergency In Case of Hazard Warning Flasher Jacking 424 INDEX BEEN Emission Control System Maintenance 341 386 Engine Air Cleaner llle 350 Block Heater i e ed aah py GO Xe 243 Break In Recommendations 7A Compartment es 338 339 Compartment Identification 338 339 Coolant Antifreeze leen 383 Exhaust Gas Caution llus 74 299 Fails t6 Statt ss esine er ue ERG 240 Flooded Starting 0000 240 Fuel Requirements 296 382 Jump Starting cie abode X e ea 332 OIL sues paths Geen EORR E E ERES 343 382 383 Oil Disposal se tessei estonte g otremi ss 346 Qil EHE se sya gene nesan eao ORO RR ae 346 Oil Selection ics bce cain eu E eda 382 Overheating ud ee asia d ae eaten dd A Eun 325 Starting Temperature Gauge sss seek ehe 164 Engine Oil Viscosity i 22 vet d RE UR ees 346 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart 346 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 60 Entry System Illuminated 20 Event Data Recorder llle 61 Exhaust Gas Caution 00005 74 299 Exhaust System lesen 355 Exterior Finish Care llle 367 Fabric Car si diae eR E Re Y DR 369 Filters ATE Cleaner ex punte ERU Eu ears 350 Engine Ruel isa duae
91. DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils 346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Engine Oil Viscosity 3 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low tempera ture starting and vehicle fuel economy Your engine oil filler cap shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity 4 0L Engine SAE 10W 30 engine oil is recommended for all operat ing temperatures This engine oil improves low tem perature starting and vehicle fuel economy Your engine oil filler cap shows the recommended engine oil vis cosity for your vehicle Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Materials Added To Engine Oils The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and it s performance may be impaired by supplemental addi tives Disposing of Used Engine Oil Care should be taken in disposing of used en
92. E FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without speed control ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes ABS Anti Lock Brake System TCS Traction Control System BAS Brake Assist System ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation and ESP Electronic Stability Program All five systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in vari ous driving conditions are commonly referred to as ESP ABS Anti Lock Brake System This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Section 5 of this manual for more information about ABS WARNING ABS Anti Lock Brake System cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevail ing road conditions ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety
93. EATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 NOTE The UConnect system use requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile version 0 96 or higher See www chrysler com uconnect for supported phones UConnect allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s micro phone for private conversation The UConnect phone book enables you to store up to 32 names and four numbers per name Each language has a separate 32 name phone book accessible only in that language This system is driven through your Blue tooth Hands Free profile cellular phone UConnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so UCon nect works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s UConnect system The UConnect system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages as equipped i 3 81969793 Microphone Location 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the system and the radio has the two con
94. EEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in either AM or FM frequen cies pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press SCAN a second time INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will be displayed In AM or FM mode pressing the TIME button will switch between the time and frequency displays Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 209 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE control knob 3 After the hours are adjusted press the right side TUNE control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE control knob Press the TUNE control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting S
95. ET CLOCK Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers 210 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME Press the rotary TUNE control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Press the rotary TUNE control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn
96. G YOUR VEHICLE BEEN CAUTION When replacing plugs do not overtighten You could damage them and cause them to leak Selection of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Front Rear Axle Fluid Fluid Level Check Lubricant should be at bottom edge of the oil fill hole Adding Fluid Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level specified above Selection of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
97. ING YOUR VEHICLE 33 Auto Up Feature with Anti Pinch Protection Driver s and Front Passenger Door Only Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the auto up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop NOTE If the window runs into any obstacle during the auto closure it will reverse direction and then stop Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window Any impact due to rough road condi tions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door below the power window switches allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window controls on the other doors press the window lockout button To enable the window controls press the window lockout button again Power Window Lock E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can
98. ING YOUR VEHICLE Se Defrosters Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should feel the air directed against the windshield Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall cracks Check wheel nuts for tightness and tires includ ing spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of all exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS a Mirrors o RE RR nE S AAE 81 Inside Day Night Mirror 81 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 82 Outside Mirrors 2 0 000 eee eee 82 Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature 83 Power Remote Control Mirrors 83 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 84 ll Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped iix hoard a ee een den 84 Operations ios d hd rS Reb mt ed
99. Instructions Hands Free Phone Manual Air Conditioning And lf Equipped ees Re 224 Heating System 24 eb ere hen 228 Operating Instructions Video Entertainment Operating Tips 0 0 eee eee 232 System VES If Equipped 224 li Video Entertainment System Sales Code XRV If Equipped 225 162 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 12 Rear Park A 9 Hazard Warning Flasher 13 Storage Bin L Electronic Stability Control Traction Control Switch LL Cigar Lighter Power Chtlet 5 Radio f Glove Bax 7 Climate Controls 8 Heated Seat Switch 1 Air Outlets 2 Instrument Cluster 3 Storage Tray 4 Center Air Outlet f Equipped amp 186cdae INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 163 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 81978324 164 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Ss INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION 1 Fuel Gauge The fuel gauge shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the ON position 2 Fuel Cap Indicator This symbol indicates the side of the vehicle ns where the fuel cap is located 3 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge indicates engine coolant temperature Any reading within the normal range indicates that the cooling system is operat ing satisfactorily The gauge needle will likely indicate a high temperature when driving in hot weather up moun tain grades in heavy traffic or when towing a
100. Liftgate Release WARNING Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your pas sengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers front airbags for both the driver and right front passenger and side curtain airbags for the driver and passengers seated next to a window If you will be carrying children too small for adult size belts your seat belts also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 NOTE The front airbags have a multi stage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer injuries including fatalities if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on
101. Mopar Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply Mopar Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen tials products Interior Care Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with Mopar Total Clean then Mopar Spot amp Stain Remover if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric defrosters Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in
102. NDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Also be sure that the front seats are fully upright and To Lower Rear Seat positioned forward This will allow the rear seat to fold 1 Locate the release strap on the lower outboard side of down easily each rear seatback WARNING v Do e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Rear Seat Release Strap 3 Fold the rear seat completely forward E UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 4 If desired push down on the seatback to lock itin the TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD folded position To open the hood two latches must be released First pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the To Raise Rear Seat instrument panel If locked in the folded position pull the release strap toward the front of the vehicle Raise the seatback and lock it into place If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position WARNING Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback in not securely locked into position the se
103. NING An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling stability braking per formance and could result in an accident Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information en STARTING AND OPERATING 309 EXAMPLE ONLY EXAMPLE ONLY FIG 1 WITHOUT WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION INCORRECT FIG 3 IMPROPER ADJUSTMENT INCORRECT 5 FIG 2 WITH WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION CORRECT gne 8la32807 Weight Distributing Hitch System Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System 310 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle is capable of towing trailers up to 2 000 Ibs 907 kg without added equipment or alterations to the standard equipment Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 Ibs 907 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Class Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt
104. NING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 420 INDEX aaa ABS Anti Lock Brake System 169 265 Adding Fuel 222v ieediebeneed esiti 300 Adding Washer Fluid 05 156 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 350 Air Conditioner Maintenance 351 Air Conditioning secasses erektis aes 228 232
105. NOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 either momentarily or continuously A single chime e The Occupant Classification System OCS is part of will sound if the light comes on again after initial start a Federally regulated safety system required for this up vehicle It is designed to turn off the front passenger airbag for an empty seat and for occupants classified WARNING in the child size category This could be a child teenager or even a adult Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it e The Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light comes on as you drive have the airbag system an amber light located in the center of the instrument checked right away panel tells the driver and front passenger when the front passenger airbag is turned off The PAD Indi cator Light illuminates the words PASS AIR BAG OFF to show that the passenger airbag will not inflate during a collision requiring airbags When the right front passenger seat is empty or when very light NOTE Children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee objects are placed on the seat the passenger airbag will not inflate even though the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated Indi
106. NTROLS ME moisture build up inside the vehicle For maximum defogging select the Outside Air position NOTE Recirculation mode will not operate in floor mix or defrost modes Air Conditioning Operation Press the temperature control knob to activate the air condi tioning mode A lamp will illuminate when the Air Con ditioning System is engaged Press the knob again to deac tivate the system B151f9fb NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds Operating Tips Window Fogging Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it s rainy or humid In most cases turning on the air conditioning pressing the snowflake button will clear the fog Adjust the temperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield Adjust the temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the defrost mode Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non filming cleaning solution vinegar and water works very well will help prevent contaminates cigarette E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 233 smoke perfumes etc from sticking to the windows Contaminates increa
107. OLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill At the intervals shown in the appropriate Maintenance Schedule the system should be drained flushed and refilled If the solution is dirty and contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old antifreeze coolant solution Discard old antifreeze coolant solution according to rec ommended procedure Selection Of Engine Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended antifreeze coolant refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct antifreeze coolant type ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357 Adding Engine Coolant PAU TION Your vehicle has been built with an improved antifreeze Mixing of antifreeze coolant other than the speci coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals This fied HOAT antifreeze coolant may result in de antifreeze coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100 000 creased corrosion protection and engine damage miles before replacement To prevent reducing this ex If a non HOAT antifreeze coolant is introduced tended maintenance period it is important that you use into the cooling system in an emergency it should the same antifreeze coolant throughout the life of your be replaced with the specified antifreeze coolant vehicle Please review these recommendati
108. OTE The backup lights will come on when your vehicle is in R Reverse gear and the ignition is in the ON position When parking your vehicle always leave a manual transmission in first gear and apply the parking brake fully to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Never use any gear as a substitute for the parking brake CAUTION To drive as safely as possible and to prolong the life of your manual transmission follow these tips e Before shifting from a forward gear into reverse or from reverse to a forward gear stop vehicle com pletely Otherwise accelerated transmission wear may result Manual Shift Controls ee STARTING AND OPERATING 245 e Do not operate at sustained high engine or road e When rocking a stuck vehicle by shifting between a speeds in lower gears Engine damage may result forward gear and reverse do not spin wheels faster e Do not downshift into a low gear while traveling at too er Hiph Ey OE CHYUIID damane MAY high a speed for that gear Engine clutch or transmis ee sion damage may result Recommended Manual Transmission Shifting Speeds e Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal This causes heat buildup and damages the clutch The manufacturer recommends that you use the shift speeds listed in the chart below When you slow down or go up a grade downshift as Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH KM H speed requires or the engine may overheat En
109. P Warning Light Brake Assist System BAS Warning Light If Equipped The malfunction lamp for the ESP is combined ESP with BAS The yellow ESP BAS Warning Lamp and the yellow ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Lamp comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light remains on E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 167 after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible NOTE The ESP TCS Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Warning Lamp come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is actively operating 11 TOW HAUL Indicator Light If Equipped The TOW HAUL button is located on the gear shift bezel This light will illuminate when the TOW HAUL button has been selected TOW 12 Turn Signal Indicator Light When a turn signal is activated a right pointing or left pointing arrow lights up and flashes to indicate the direction of the turn These indicators also indicate proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights If either indicator flashes at a faster rate than normal
110. P3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates 204 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME MPEG Specifi cation Sampling Fre quency KHa Bit rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 WMA Specifica tion WMA Sampling Fre quency KHz 44 1 and 48 Bit Rate kbps 48 64 96 128 160 192 VBR ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the followi
111. PASS VARIANCE MAP anaran en INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 179 To Manually Calibrate the Compass Start the engine and leave the transmission in the P Park position Press and hold approximately 10 sec onds the odometer trip odometer reset button until the current variance zone number is displayed Release the odometer trip odometer reset button then press and hold again approximately 10 seconds until the direc tion is displayed with the CAL indicator on continu ously in the display To complete the compass calibration drive the vehicle in one or more complete 360 degree circles under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from power lines large metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display It is located on the instrument cluster in the lower half of the fuel coolant temperature gauge 180 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted buttons described in this section are also equipped with the EVIC The EVIC consists of the following e System Status e Vehicle information warning message displays e Tire Pressure Monitor System If Equipped Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features e Compass display Outside temperature display Trip computer functions e UConnect hand
112. Passing Light You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multi function control lever toward the steering wheel This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released Front Fog Lights If Equipped O The front fog light switch is in the multi function control lever To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking or low beam headlights and pull out the end of the lever NOTE The fog lights will only operate with the parking lights or the headlights on low beam Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Turn Signals Move the multi function control lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights You can signal a lane change by moving the lever partially up or down without moving beyond the detent If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective NOTE Atone will chime if the turn signals are left on for more than 1 mile 2 km 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The headlights come on at a low intensity level after the vehicle has been driven ap
113. Pressing the Music Type button or turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type informa tion Toggle the Music Type button to select the following format types Program Type 16 ab il Dis No program type or un None defined Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Country Foreign Language Language Information Inform Jazz Jazz News News Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies Personality Persnlty Public Public 196 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se Rhythm and Blues R amp B Religious Music Rel Musc Religious Talk Rel Talk Rock Rock Soft Soft Soft Rock Soft Rck Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Sports Sports Talk Talk Top 40 Top 40 Weather Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Use Tune Control Knob to scroll through the entries and push Au
114. RCHWIPER ADE ABERAT STEERINGSLID P MD MEASHER Q EO me TRA ENGHE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL XL TEME TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM D e zDD e d g D FR NT FOG LIGHT Qt CX LFTGATE RELEASE REAR FOG LAM AND UFTSATE DEFRGSI AND VENTILATING FA ihi LOK THROTTLE FOJE WHEEL WARNING FRH MG up wx v A INTRODUCTION 7 aq a c S mw ELECTRONIC STABILITY ADIUETAELE ELECTROMI PROORAM i BRAKE PEDALS SPEEDGOMTROL ASSIST SYSTEM Q 2 0 BRAKE 3TEM KEV ACTUATE UPPERAND LOWER HEATED REAT MWDUMLIFT TAETREHLIKE HILLBESEENT MAAMME RAKING BRAF TURN SIGNALS UPPER AR HEATED BEAT DOC LOH ILMET IFCnMER DRITLET ARO CONTROL do o bo A HOOD RELEASE LONER UR RECIRCULATION TRARUON ALL WHEEL Fag uae OF ANTIOCH UTLET non CRM CONTROL Oivi BRAS SYSTEM Ps pf es dioi AME ELEGTBONK ARAHF SYSTEM FEN LOWER AIR OUTL CONTROL DIRE BRAKE Gs rk Hi nf BLEING DOS TUHK DETE AIRLONDNTIDMNG CHED SEAT RECEN TIOR WARNING RELERME TETHER AHGHUR BUTTGR Al T Tm UN LAWER ANCHORS SLDING DOCR EMERGENCY UGHTEK AHDTETHER FO lICDMNECT HAZARD RELEASE HANDLE CHILDREN LATCHI BUTTON C a bo m DOCR AAR CONVERTELE SOMYERTINE SEE UNER D To DOWN WANUAL rci 815137 8 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures which could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures which could result in damage
115. ROLS 181 Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in Park Left Right Front Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph Left Right Rear Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Liftgate Ajar with a single chime Left Front Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Section 5 of this manual Left Rear Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Section 5 of this manual 182 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se e Right Front Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Section 5 of this manual e Right Rear Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Section 5 of this manual Check TPM System with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Section 5 of this manual Check Gascap refer to Adding Fuel in Section 5 of this manual for more details Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy e Distance To Empty e Elapsed Time e Display Units of Measure in Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion e Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fue
116. S OF YOUR VEHICLE M 1 Open the tailgate 2 Squeeze the right hand release handle Sliding Panel 4 Squeeze the right hand release handle to slide the panel back into the vehicle 19 a8bfc Release Handle 3 Pull out the sliding panel N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper Washer If Equipped A rotary ring switch on the control lever located on the right side of the steering column controls operation of the rear wiper washer function Rotating the center of the switch up to the On position will activate the wiper Rotating the switch ring beyond the On or Off position will activate the rear washer The wash pump will continue to operate as long as the lever or ring is engaged Upon release the wipers will cycle three times before returning to the set position Windshield Wiper Washer Switch If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the Park position When the vehicle is restarted the wiper will resume function at whichever position the switch is set at 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M If the swing gate flip up window is open or the swing gate is open connection to the rear window wiper is interrupted preventing activation of the rear wiper blade When the swing gate flip up window or the swing gate is closed the rear wiper switch or the ignition switch needs to be t
117. SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE E INTRODUCTION 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE cece eee hh mnn 4 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 2 cece cece cece cere ccc ccccrceccceccs Fs STARTING AND OPERATING 2 cece ccc cece ccc hh hn e WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES cece ccc c cece cc cc o tn 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ccc cee ccc ccc c cere cere eee e eee e ee hh 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES eeeeeeeeeeeeeesse hh i htt 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE e eeeeeeeeeeeeee ehh hh hm ntn 10 Up Se LR I UL C E INTRODUCTION CONTENTS Mueve P 4 Warnings And Cautions 8 Roll Over Warning 00 0000 5 Bl Vehicle Identification Number 8 Bl How To Use This Manual 6 Bl Vehicle Modifications Alterations 9 4 INTRODUCTION EE INTRODUCTION This manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for conveni
118. Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 223 SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for 8 seconds before continuing to the next To stop the search press SCAN a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle between Artist Song Title and Composer if available information Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional 3 seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for 5 seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE control knob within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Toggle
119. Sed det hide ade quiu l Engine een 383 Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL 381 la Fluid Capacities i ces ns 382 338 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 7L AIR CLEANER ENGINE OIL BRAKE FLUID FUSES INTEGRATED FILTER DIPSTICK RESERVOIR POWER MODULE COOLANT ENGINE OIL COOLANT WASHER BATTERY PRESSURE CAP FILE BOTTEE FLUID BOTTLE B1SblcI EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 339 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 4 0L AIR CLEANER ENGINE OIL BRAKE FLUID FUSES INTEGRATED FILTER DIPSTICK RESERVOIR POWER MODULE COOLANT COOLANT WASHER ENGINE OIL BATTERY PRESSURE CAP BOTTLE FLUID BOTTLE FILE E182h0B2 340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Pr
120. System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two 2 seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the engine NOTE A key that has not been programmed is consid ered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will turn on for three 3 seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two 2 seconds If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle ser v
121. T Occupat 1 210 Ib Oecupanm 2 180 Iba 3 2 t cruparn 3 150 Its TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 lbs 325 lbs EXAMPLE 3 CDecupant 1 200 Ibs Oeeupan z 200 lbg 2 2 9 TOTAL WEIGHT 400 Ibs 865 ibs minus 400 lbs 465 Ibs 81124d11 278 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING 1 Safety Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents e Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION shock Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause damage that results in tire failure Tire Pressure Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and lems You could lose control of your vehicle satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary Overinflated or under inflated tires can affect areas are affected by improper tire pressure vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire properly inflated increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them es STARTING AND OPERATING 279 2 Econo
122. The UConnect system compatible phones in market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only either answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress To make a second call while you are currently in a call press the Voice Recognition button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phone book entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls To combine two calls refer to Conference Call Place Retrieve a Call from Hold To put a call on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at one time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the Voice Recogni tion button whi
123. The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they re commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers 308 STARTING AND OPERATING MEM Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with gross axle weight rating GAWR requirements WAR
124. UR VEHICLE M Chassis Component Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts Automatic Transmission Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Manual Transmission Mopar Manual Transmission Lubricant or equivalent meeting the re quirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS 9224 Transfer Case Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Front Axle SAE 80W 90 Multipurpose Type GL 5 Gear Lubricant or equivalent Rear Axle SAE 75W 140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent Brake Master Cylinder Manual Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE Transmission Clutch System J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only rec ommended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir Mopar ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS ll Emission Control System Maintenance 386 Schedule B i i he c ee B Maintenance Schedules 386 Schedule A 23 Lies prend Ug e M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 386 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to assure the continued proper functioning of the emission control system These and all other maintenance services included in
125. ace the spark plugs 3 7L Only X Inspect the brake linings X Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid X Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed Not X required if belt was previously replaced Inspect the manual transmission fluid add as nec X essary 3 7L Only Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary X en SCHEDULE B 397 Replace the spark plugs 4 0L Only Inspect the timing belt replace if necessary 4 0L Only X X Miles 93 000 96 000 99 000 102 000 105 000 Kilometers 155 000 160 000 165 000 170 000 175 000 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X replaced at 3 months Rotate the tires X X Inspect the engine air filter element replace if X necessary Inspect the brake linings Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed Not required if belt was previously replaced Flush and replace the engine coolant anti freeze if not done at 60 000 miles 100 000 km M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 398 SCHEDULE B NENNEN Inspect the PCV Valve and replace if necessary Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Only Miles 108 000 111 000 114 000 117 000 120 000 Kilometers 18
126. ad Restraints lees 113 Heated ii suse e rer PA eA oad 113 Rear Folding esee 115 Reclining 24 606 s603 sr Ra ren 111 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 19 166 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 383 Selection of Oil 2 0 eee 345 Sentry Key Immobilizer 0 16 Service Assistance eee eee 412 Service Contract 0 eee eee 414 Service Manuals 0 cee eee eee 416 Setting the Clock en INDEX 433 Settings Personal irea eR he Reg 188 Shift Lock Manual Override 248 Shift Speeds Manual Transmission 245 Shifting Automatic Transmission 249 254 Manual Transmission ss 243 Shoulder Belts 2 0 00 cee ee es 38 Signals Turri asss pace x kia hes 121 167 379 381 Sliding Cargo Floor Load N GO aed ease one ROSE Eee ox eS 153 Snow Chains Tire Chains 285 Spare Tire ases p e eR Op ae NN bod ead 327 Spark Plugs uci Chee ee RS ERS 347 Specifications Fuel Gasoline 1 0 000 296 OU ye senor eee cerns fae MR eae E 345 Speed Control Cruise Control 125 Speedomeltef 4 seh ig paa ee enia s dran 166 DATING xou gacete dg dba eae euh Er needs 239 Automatic Transmission ss 239 Cold Weather 0 e ee eee 240 Emergency Jump Starting 332 Engine Block Heater llle 243 Engine Fails to Start
127. ad capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib 276 STARTING AND OPERATING Se passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capaci ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle NOTE For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs 392 Kg es STARTING AND OPERATING 277 Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight Decupa 1 200 Iba EXAMPLE 1 5 2 3 865 ibs 195 lbs EXAMPLE 7
128. ailable from your dealer They will help you keep your vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra tion NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 ITY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www NHTSA gov or write to NHTSA U S Dept of Transportation Washington DC 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 416 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the p
129. al and does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur STARTING AND OPERATING 269 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings SERVICE MAXIMUM DESCRIPTION LOAD MAXIMUM SIZE DESIGNATION PRESSURE TREADWEAR U S DOT TRACTION SAFETY AND STANDARDS TEMPERATURE CODE GRADES TIN 81154468 NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Ex ample P215 65R15 95H 270 STARTING AND OPERATING ME European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16
130. al that occurs first engine oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever comes first and follow Schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual CAUTION NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then flush and replace your engine coolant anti freeze every 102 000 miles 170 000 km or 60 months whichever comes first and follow Schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual At Each Stop for Fuel Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle NOTE Most vehicles are operated under the conditions Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully listed for Schedule B warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu Second is Schedule A It is for vehicles that are not racy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the operated under any of the conditions listed under Sched level isat or below the ADD or MIN mark ule B M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 e Check the windshield washer solvent add as required M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 388 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM Once a Month e Check the tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake mas
131. all control under the mirror to the night position IONS toward rear of truck The mirror should be adjusted E while set in the day position toward windshield Adjusting Rearview Mirror 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror will automatically adjust for annoying head light glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light in the button will indicate when the dimming feature is activated 817892c4 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your right side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the right side mirror Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature Folding exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or r
132. an 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for chil dren who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System in this section 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seat back they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seat back should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or n
133. an hold a variety of items The maximum load capacity of the load floor is 400 Ibs 181 kg The cargo load floor is held by spring loaded latches In order to use the cargo load floor use the following procedure 1 Push side mounted release handles toward center of vehicle to release cover Floor Panel 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Lift cover Utility Table If Equipped i b The cargo load floor can be converted into a utility table JEEP covet oyen and doc panel Tack mio Peston The maximum load capacity of the utility table is 100 Ibs 45 kg In order to use the utility table use the following procedure Load Floor ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 1 Push side mounted release handles toward center of 4 Insert the legs into their corner positions vehicle to release cover 5 Set the table on level ground CAUTION To avoid personal injury do not stand or sit on the table Rear Cargo Slide Out System LOAD N GO If Equipped The sliding cargo load floor LOAD N GO slides back and forth on steel tracks for convenience The maximum load capacity is 400 Ibs 181 kg The floor panel can stop Floor Panel every 2 inches 50 mm when the handle is released to 2 Lift the cover and remove from vehicle lock the panel in position 3 Flip the cover over and remove table legs from their retainers 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURE
134. and Loading Informa tion placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety han dling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifi cations or capability 284 STARTING AND OPERATING Mmm WARNING CAUTION Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than Replacing original tires with tires of a different size that specified for your vehicle Some combina tions of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance charac teristics resulting in changes to steering han dling and braking of your vehicle This can cause j unpredictable handling and stress to steering and Alignment and Balance suspension components You could lose control Poor suspension alignment may result in and have an accident resulting in serious injury or may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings e Fast tire wear death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle j e Uneven tire wear such as feathering and one sided Never use a tire with a smaller load index or 2 nie wear capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load e Vehicle pull
135. and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation Stone and gravel impact Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near sea coast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Bird droppings Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove e Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN CAUTION Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces Special Care If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and tailgate must be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner e If you
136. applied the light will flash when the gear position is out of park for automatic transmis sions If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary Operating the vehicle in this condition is danger ous 15 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Warning Light If Equipped This light informs you of a problem with the 4 Electronic Throttle Control system If a prob lem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see your dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on for 15 seconds as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer 16 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light The yellow ESP indicator light in the speedom e eter area illuminates with the key in the igni tion switch turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running The ESP TCS Indicator Light starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is a
137. arter maneuver ing parking or stopping To use your brakes and accelerator more safely follow these tips e Do not drive too fast for road conditions especially when roads are wet or slushy A wedge of water can 268 STARTING AND OPERATING MEM build up between the tire tread and the road This hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction braking ability and control After going through deep water or a car wash brakes may become wet resulting in decreased performance and unpredictable braking action Dry the brakes by gentle intermittent pedal action while driving at very slow speeds POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered norm
138. as senger Seat Only Occupant Classification Module Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light Weight Sensors How The Airbag System Works e The Occupant Restraint Control ORC Module de termines if a frontal side or rollover collision is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate The front airbag inflators are designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the ORC The ORC may also modify the rate of inflation based on the occupant size provided by the Occupant Classification Module The ORC will not detect roll over or rear impacts The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items listed above except the knee bolster the instru ment panel and the steering wheel and column If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning er Light and PAD Indicator Light for 6 to 8 seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off The PAD Indicator Light will function normally Refer to Pas senger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light in this section If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light en THINGS TO K
139. at will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury Hood Release Lever 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Then push the safety latch lever to the left It is located between the grille and hood opening right of the center Btdidaae Underhood Safety Latch To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Use a firm downward push at the center front edge of the hood to ensure that both latches engage Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged NOTE Ensure hood prop rod is fully seated into clip before closing hood to prevent damage to grille WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 LIGHTS Interior Lights The overhead light comes on when a door is opened It may also be turned on by rotating the control for the dimmer switch on the multi function control lever fully upward The overhead light will automatically turn off in about 20 minutes if a door is left open or the dimmer control is left in the dome light position Turn the ignition switch ON to restore the overhead light operation Daytime Brightness Feature Certain instrument panel components odometer radio display ca
140. at your vehicle s OBD system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD system is ready or not ready if the MIL symbol is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non Mopar parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 343 DEALER SERVICE Your dealer has the qualified service personnel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civi
141. ates cessation of the call on the UConnect system and transfer of the call to the mobile phone e After ignition key is switched to off a call can continue on the UConnect system for certain duration after which the call is automatically transferred from the UConnect system to the mobile phone 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off UConnect System Features Language Selection To change the language that the UConnect system is using e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais if so equipped e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every UConnect language change op eration only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the Phone button to
142. ature of the air in side the passenger compart ment The blue area of the scale indicates cooler tem peratures while the red area indicates warmer tempera tures If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula tion of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce air flow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance 230 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Mode Control The mode control allows you to choose from several pat terns of air distribution You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols or a blend of two of these modes The closer the control is to a particular s 1944e2 MOde the more air distribu tion you receive from that mode Panel 7 Air is directed through the four outlets in the instru ment panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct air flow Bi Level N Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE There is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets and side window demist outlets with a small amount through the defrost outlet Mix QV
143. aving the vehicle Parking Brake 260 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and WARNING the gear shift lever is in the P Park position automatic transmission or R Reverse or 1st gear manual trans e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav mission When parking on a hill you should apply the ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage parking brake before placing the gear shift lever in P or injury Also be certain to leave an automatic Park otherwise the load on the transmission locking transmission in P Park a manual transmission in mechanism may make it difficult to move the selector out R Reverse or 1st gear Failure to do so may allow of P Park the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dan gerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake problems due to excessive heating of the rear brakes EE STARTING AND OPERATING 265 WARNING Significant over or under inflation of tires or mixing When parking on a hill turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade The parking brake should always be applied whenever the drive
144. ay exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Sunroof Maintenance E Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET This vehicle has two auxiliary power outlets that can provide up to 20 Amps of current for accessories de signed for use with the standard power outlet adapters The front power outlet located in the lower portion of the instrument panel has a snap on plastic cap so that it can be covered when not in use As a safety precaution the outlet in the instrument panel only operates with the ignition switch ON When the optional Cigar Lighter Front Power Outlet heating element is used it heats when pushed in and pops out automatically when ready for use To preserve the heating element do not hold the lighter in the heating position N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 The rear power outlet if equipped is located in the left Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off rear cargo area WARNING e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw po
145. be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting LIFTGATE The vacuum fluorescent VF display located in the odometer area displays the word gATE as an indica tion of when the liftgate is not completely closed When the vehicle is not moving and the liftgate is not com pletely closed the VF display will show the word gATE On EVIC equipped vehicles GATE AJAR will be displayed If any other active warnings are present they will be shown in the VF display and will also continue to cycle If the vehicle is moving three single chimes will occur if the rear liftgate is open one chime for each complete display cycle After this the VF display will continue to sequence only no chimes If the trip reset button is pressed while the VF warnings are being displayed the VF display will revert back to only displaying the odometer trip odometer mileage 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se To open the liftgate pull up squeeze on the handle and lift Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with the plunger or a key in the lock cylinder will not unlock the liftgate B182bHae
146. beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow to scroll through tracks faster in CD MP3 MWA modes SCAN Button CD MODE Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display 202 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the Radio to the Radio mode RND Button Random Play Button CD MODE Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the
147. blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc Windshield Washers The fluid reservoir in the engine compartment should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield antifreeze not radiator anti freeze rated not to freeze at 25 F 31 C Operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water WARNING Commercial windshield washer solvents are flam mable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355 Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Repla
148. bottom of the switch will decrease the volume The button located in the center of the right hand control will switch modes to Radio or CD E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 227 The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next pre set station that you have programmed in the radio pre set push buttons CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch changes CD s on the 6 Disc in dash CD changer radio This button does not function for all other radios CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep the CD DVD discs in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the s
149. button will allow user to set the clock Turn TUNE control knob to adjust the hours then press and turn the TUNE control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE control knob again to save changes AM and FM Buttons Press buttons to select AM or FM Modes SET Button To Set the Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window 212 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will be displayed Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Di
150. carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes E Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to the Tires General Information section of this manual on Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic before towing a trailer Refer to the Tires General brake controller is not required Also check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage 318 STARTING AND OPERATING MEM WARNING Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hy draulic brake lines It can overload your brake sys tem and cause it to fail You might not have brakes Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg CAUTION when you need them and could have an accident
151. cator Light Location The PAD Indicator Light should not be illuminated when a adult passenger is properly seated in the front passenger seat In this case the airbag is ready to be inflated if a collision requiring an airbag occurs For occupants classified into the child size category the PAD Indicator Light will be illuminated indicating that the front passenger airbag is turned off and will not inflate If the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated DO NOT assume the airbag is turned off and move the child restraint to the rear seat A deploying passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to a child in a rear facing infant seat NOTE Even though this vehicle is equipped with an Occupant Classification System children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 Passenger Air Front Passenger bag Disable Seat Occupant PAD Indicator Airbag Status Light Adult OFF ON Grocery Bags Heavy Briefcases and Other Rela ON OFF tively Light Ob jects Empty or Very Small Objects DRE SET Since the system senses weight some small objects will turn the PAD Indicator Light on The OCS classifies an occupant using weight sensors mounted in the base of the front passenger seat Any weight on the seat will be sensed by the system Objects hanging on the seat or other passengers p
152. ce the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering The Security Alarm System is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will arm unexpectedly If you remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the transmitter once the system is armed after 16 seconds when you pull the door handle to exit the alarm will sound If this occurs press the Unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter to disarm the system The Security Alarm System will not disarm with a manual unlock either through the lock plunger located on the inside of the door or through a key in the driver s door key cylinder ILLUMINATED ENTRY The interior lights come on when you open any door They will remain on for about 30 seconds after all doors are closed then fade to off ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 The lights also will fade to off if you turn on the ignition after you close all the doors REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY 81869372 Three Button Keyfob NOTE For the remote starting feature if equipped refer to the Remote Starting System section NOTE Your vehicle s keyfob may have three or four buttons depending on the optional features purchased with your vehicle This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors liftgate or activate the panic alarm from a minimum distance of 23 feet 7 meters using your keyfob The keyfob does
153. ce as required Cooling System WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot antifreeze coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood don t open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot Engine Coolant Checks Check antifreeze coolant protection every 12 months Ij before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If antifreeze coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh antifreeze coolant Check the front of the A C condenser if equipped or radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a 356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN garden hose vertically down the face of the A C con denser if equipped or the back of the radiator core Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of antifreeze coolant from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the antifreeze coolant will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT RE MOVE THE CO
154. ck lever down 5 Move the shift lever into the N Neutral position 6 The vehicle may then be started in N Neutral Have your vehicle inspected by your local authorized dealer if the shift lock manual override has been used ee STARTING AND OPERATING 249 Brake Transmission Interlock System This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out of P Park and into any gear unless the brake pedal is pressed Always depress the brake pedal first before moving the gear selector out of P Park 4 Speed Automatic Transmission 3 7L Engine Shifting from D Drive to P Park or R Reverse or from P or R to D should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the shift lever between these gears Automatic Shift Controls Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from P Park or N Neutral position into another gear range 250 STARTING AND OPERATING ME P Park WARNING This gear position supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P this range Never use P Park while the vehicle is in Park or N Neutral if the engine speed is higher motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the vehicle in this range Always apply parking brake first brake pedal the vehicle could accel
155. ckled The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be en abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position The manufacturer does not recom mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and fasten the driver seat belt 2 Start the engine and wait for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle unbuckle and then re buckle the driver seat belt at least three times ending with the seat belt buckled 4 Turn off the engine A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the pro gramming The Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert can be reacti vated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while the driver seat belt remains unfastened Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE S
156. conds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for 3 seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file 218 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME Press and hold the INFO button again for 3 seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will be displayed for 5 seconds when ignition is off Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to th
157. ctive If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions The ESP TCS Indicator Light becomes illuminated when the ESP Off button has been pressed or ESP is only partially available caused by lack of engine management or brake thermal model INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 169 17 Voltage Warning Light This light monitors the electrical system voltage The light should turn on momentarily as the engine is started If the light stays on or turns on while driving it indicates a problem with the charging system Immediate service should be obtained 18 SERV Service 4WD Indicator Light If Equipped The SERV 4WD Indicator Light will come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and will stay on for 2 seconds If the light stays on or comes on during driving it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required 19 Anti Lock Brake Warning Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System SERV a4wD which is described elsewhere in this manual This light will come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and may stay on for 170 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se approximately 3 seconds If this light remains on or comes on during driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system
158. cushion surfaces Tether Strap Mounting Latch Anchorages en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage bars pushing aside the seat cover material Then locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or
159. d 87 Phone Call Features 93 UConnect System Features 96 Advanced Phone Connectivity 100 Things You Should Know About Your UConnect SYSTEM 1 a eia dones ep E rete rein 102 bh RM 110 Front Manual Seat Adjustment 110 Front Seat Adjustment Recline 111 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 78 6 Way Driver s Power Seat With Manual Recline 222i o o yao s 112 Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat 113 Head Restraints llle 113 Heated Seats If Equipped 113 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat With Fold Flat Feature 222362 x be bebo RR GO RE 115 ll To Open And Close The Hood 117 alilis oceo RR Geis oe Fee a 119 Interior Lights 119 Multi Function Control Lever 119 Parking Lights Instrument Panel Lights And Headlights 4 koe eo XE 120 Lights On Reminder ss 120 Headlight Dimmer Switch 120 Passing Light se ced ek ern es 121 Front Fog Lights If Equipped 121 Turn Signals 2 gsi ae ek Eg are a gen 121 Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 122 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 122 Intermittent Wiper System 122 Windshield Wiper Operation 123 Windshield Washers lesus 12
160. d gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation If the problem persists P Park R Reverse and N Neutral will continue to operate Only Second gear range will operate in the D Drive shifter position Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly differ ent feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops or during accelera tion the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages 5 Speed Automatic Transmission 4 0L Engine The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles ee STARTING AND OPERATING 255 Automatic Shift Controls Gear Ranges NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold If there is a need to restart the engine be sure to cycle the key to the LOCK position before restarting Transmission gear enga
161. d lower attach ments must be installed in the outboard positions only Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to the next section for typical installation instructions Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seat back and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you In addition there are tether strap anchorages behind each run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and rear seating position located on the back of the seat seat
162. d not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 329 Jacking Instructions 1 Remove spare tire 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 3 Remove jack and tools from mounting bracket As semble the tools by connecting the driver to the exten sion and then to the lug wrench 330 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 4 Locate the jack as shown For the front tires place it in the notch on the body weld seam behind wheel to be changed For the rear tires place it under the axle by the wheel to be changed Position the jack handle on the jack Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged BOF354b4 Rear Jacking Location 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability 8035497 Front Jacking Location EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 331 WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable and cause an accident It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the lug nuts and wheel 7 Position the spare wheel tire on the vehicle and install lug nuts with cone shaped end toward wheel Lightly tigh
163. d severe or fatal injury Drive carefully Ay WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK B bfeonfo Roll Over Warning Label Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In fact the U S government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10 000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by 2 INTRODUCTION 5 6 INTRODUCTION EE million annually In a roll over crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the table of contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed index at the rear of this manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this owner manual B mY WATER IH FLIEL i FUEL B FELEL SOE BATTERY CHARH HO CS L N PLUG G MALF UYETION IMCICATOR LIGHT DU REAR WINDOW WANJAHELD WIPER EXTERIOR HIRE WIPER INTERMITTEHT FAILURE oo5 REAR WINDOW WOSHIELO MASTER LOMTING Ww TERMITTEMT WIPER WABHER REAR HIND wIMOSHIELU WASHER WOME LIGHT ASKER FLUID LEVEL p az TANDSHELD REAR CA CLOGTRIGALLY PARR LIGHTS DEFRIDST HEATED MEKTEDWEROR WIRDEMIELN IM TUMNT PANEL DERGE e o0 WiMDOHKE
164. dio Select button to select an entry and make changes e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu If Equipped e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between ll playing the DVD or pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button If Equipped E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 197 e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e Subtitle Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc If Equipped e Audio Stream Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc If Equipped e Angle Repeatedly Pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if it is supported by the DVD disc If Equipped NOTE The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc NOTE These selections can only be made while playing a DVD VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF If Equipped VES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls If Equipped VES CH1 CH2 Allows the user to change mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the Audio Select button If Equipped Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow user to set the clock Turn TUNE control knob to adjust the hours then press and tur
165. driver s side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap has been designed Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap for use with this vehicle 81937590 E STARTING AND OPERATING 301 CAUTION CAUTION Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling into the fuel system Also a poorly fitting after NOTE When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the market cap can cause the MIL Malfunction Indica fuel tankis fall tor Light to illuminate due to fuel vapors escaping from the system WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near CAUTION the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and will cause the malfunction indi cator light to turn on 302 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE Tighten the gas cap about 1 4 turn until you hear one click This is an indication that cap is properly tightened If the gas cap is not tighten properly the Malfunction Indicator Light will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled WARNING A fire may result i
166. dverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully re view this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing 306 STARTING AND OPERATING MEM Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The gross trailer weight GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or temporary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recom mended way to measure GTW is to put
167. e Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS DRIVER AIRBAG PASSENGER AIRBAG KNEE BOLSTERS B196ce7e Front Airbag Components This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the steering wheel The passenger side airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers NOTE The fro
168. e Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 215 Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50
169. e Satellite Radio section of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 219 SALES CODE RER AM FM CD DVD RADIO WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate Satellite Navigation Radio with CD Player with MP3 Capability RER combines a CGlobal Positioning System based navigation system with an integrated color screen to provide maps turn identification selection menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destina tions and routes This radio has a hard drive CD s can be ripped to the hard drive and the map data comes loaded on the hard drive Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Clock Setting Procedure The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite The satellites clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the sys tem s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set To manually set the clock change the time zone or change daylight savings information use a ball point pen or
170. e book when vehicle is not in motion is recommended e It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the UConnect phone book e UConnect phone book name tag recognition rate is E optimized for the person who stored the name in the phone book e You can say O letter O for 0 zero 800 must be spoken eight zero zero e Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se low to medium vehicle speed low road noise smooth road surface fully closed windows and dry weather condition operation from driver seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the UConnect system e Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the UConnect system When this happens the connec tion can generally be re established by switching the phone off on Your cell phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth on mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five 5 seconds prior to usi
171. e player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD 214 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Bjecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow to scroll through tracks faster in CD MP3 modes SCAN Button Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of the current CD track title Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button Switches the Radio to the Radio mode RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activat
172. e speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced TIRE WEAR INDI These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 inch 2 mm When the indicators appear in 2 or more adjacent grooves the tire should be replaced Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point EN STARTING AND OPERATING 283 Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident result ing in serious injury or death Keep unmounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed see the paragraph on tread wear indicators Refer to the Tire
173. e traveled for trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for trip B since the last reset Compass Temperature Display Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and Geographic North In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings In order to ensure compass accuracy the com pass variance should be properly set according to the compass variance map zone that the vehicle is in 178 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 3 NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from i the top of the right rear quarter window This is where the compass sensor is located To Set the Variance Start the engine and leave the transmission in the P Park position Press and hold approximately ten sec onds the odometer trip odometer reset button until the current variance zone number is displayed To change the zone press and release the odometer trip odometer reset button to increment the variance one step Repeat as necessary until the desired variance is achieved NOTE The factory default zone is 8 During program ming the zone value will wrap around from zone 15 to lh ee zone 1 Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic inaccurate or abnormal you may wish to calibrate the compass Prior to calibrat ing the compass make sure the proper zone is selected COM
174. earward to resist damage Power Mirror Switches Select a mirror and press one of the four arrows for the Power Remote Control Mirrors direction you want the mirror to move Use the mirror select switch located on driver s side door trim panel to adjust the view obtained in the outside mirrors Press the switch to the L or R for Left or Right mirror selection 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward The lights will turn on automati cally Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light Lighted Vanity Mirror Sun Visor Slide Out Feature The sun visor slide on rod feature allows for addi tional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the sun 1 Fold down sun visor 2 Pull the sun visor toward inside rearview mirror to extend HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect IF EQUIPPED UConnect is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system UConnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is trans mitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UConnect system es UNDERSTANDING THE F
175. eas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the 298 STARTING AND OPERATING MEM manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Metha nol MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plu
176. easures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The UConnect system will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un mute Mute off When you mute the UConnect system you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e Following the beep say Mute 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M In order to un mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e Following the beep say Mute off Information Service When using AT amp T Wireless Service dialing to phone number 121 you can access voice activated automated system to receive news weather stocks traffic etc related information This is a AT amp T provided service Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The UConnect system allows on going calls to be transf
177. eck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 having attachments for those anchorages will continue to also have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail able for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retro fit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle The two outboard rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attachments Child seats with fixe
178. ecognition button during the playing of the desired name and say Call H NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The UConnect system will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UConnect system if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the UConnect system Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press Phone button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell phone Press the Phone button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME NOTE
179. ed is reached and the new speed will be set es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Tapping the SET DECEL button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed decrease Each time the button is tapped speed decreases NOTE The Speed Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple speed control switch functions are operated simultaneously in order to ensure proper op eration If this occurs the system can be reactivated by pushing the speed control switch ON OFF button and re setting the desired vehicle SET speed Manual Transmission Depressing the clutch pedal will disengage the speed control A slight increase in engine RPM before the speed control disengages is normal Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions may need to be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without speed loss WARNING Speed Control can be dangerous where the system can t maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Don t use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Speed Control On Hills NOTE The speed control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal 128 UNDERSTANDING TH
180. edules Section of this manual More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per formed STARTING AND OPERATING 287 NOTE The Premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS automatically locate the pressure values displayed inthe IF EQUIPPED correct vehicle position following a tire rotation The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle The suggested rotation method is the forward cross deb ended cold placard pressure shown in the following diagram The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 11 C This means that when e the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will ES E decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire FRONT pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than 3 hours and in outside ambient temperature Refer to the Tires General Information in this section for E j 32 B a information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment sosiese4 for this increased pressure 288 STARTING AND OPERATING Se The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire pr
181. eeds above approximately 35 mph 56 km h When To Use TOW HAUL Mode When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs press the TOW HAUL button This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting When es STARTING AND OPERATING 253 operating in TOW HAUL mode the transmission will shift to 3rd gear and 4th will be enabled under steady cruise conditions Tow Haul Button The TOW HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation If the TOW HAUL mode is desired the switch must be pressed each time the engine is started Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored for abnormal condi tions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the transmission limp home mode will be engaged In this mode the transmission will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop 254 STARTING AND OPERATING ME To reset the transmission use the following procedure 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Move the shift lever to the P Park position 3 Turn off the engine be sure to turn the key to the LOCK position 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds then restart the en gine 5 Move the shift lever to the desire
182. elease and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing press the switch forward and hold This allows the sunroof to move towards the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the V button and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle m
183. elected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will be displayed Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to push button memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES9 Guide E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 225 VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM SALES CODE XRV IF EQUIPPED The optional VES Video Entertainment System con sists of a DVD player and LCD liquid crystal display screen a battery powered remote control and two head sets Refer to your VES User s Manual for detailed operating instructions The LCD screen is located on the headliner behind the 4 front seats Press the release button and lower the screen Overhead Display Screen 226 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME B 361d54e Remote Control Location REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches BACK VIEW OF STEERING WHEEL 819070 The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center Pressing the top of the switch will increase the volume and pressing the
184. elt push the red button marked PRESS on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow it to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seating positions the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Press the release button to release the anchorage and then move it up or down to the position that serves you best Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you ll prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position Automatic Locking Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Anytime a child safety seat is installed
185. en it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if by pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to do something more Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position To attach a child restraint tether strap ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Route the tether strap over the seat back and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat For the outboard seating positions route the tether over An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to the head rests and attach the hook to the tether anchor increased head motion and possible injury to the located on the back of the seat child Use only the anchor positions directly behind pu Dra the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts Tether Strap Mounting 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required
186. ent reference and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained techni cians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm Roll Over Warning Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll over rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance higher center of gravity and narrower track than many passenger cars It is capable of perform ing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can be caused to go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity and the narrower track if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not Do not attempt sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident roll over of the vehicle an
187. equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers en STARTING AND OPERATING 315 NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac ard in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle driv etrain components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may damage your vehicle e During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this m manual When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings 316 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident
188. er EVIC Display If Equipped When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Compass Trip Computer or Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 175 COMPASS AND TRIP COMPUTER IF EQUIPPED The Compass Trip Computer features a driver interactive display displays information on outside tem perature compass direction and trip information It is located on the lower left part of the cluster below the fuel and engine temperature gauge and the tachometer Compass Trip Computer Display The compass trip computer when the appropriate con ditions exist will show the following messages in the odometer display e Door Ajar door e Lift Gate Ajar gATE 176 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS EE e Loose Fuel Cap gASCAP These messages can be manually turned off by pressing the right button on the instrument cluster Control Buttons Press and release the odometer trip odometer reset but ton right side of the instrument cluster to access the compass trip computer displays Display Button ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 177 Trip Conditions Trip Odometer ODO This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset Press and release the right button on the instru ment cluster to switch from odometer to trip A or trip B Press and hold the right button while the odometer trip odometer is displayed to reset Trip A Shows the total distanc
189. er door locks will unlock automatically In addition approximately 5 seconds after the vehicle has stopped moving the interior lights will illuminate to aid visibility NOTE The interior lights can only be deactivated if the key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is driven ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 Maintaining Your Airbag System Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbag system ready to inflate for your protection in an impact The airbag system is designed to be maintenance free If any of the following Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you occurs have an authorized dealer service the system need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the componsnts or wiring lean adding any Kind of badges or promptly stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper or vehicle body structure e Does not come on during the 6 to 8 seconds after the Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system The airbag 1gnition switch is first turned on may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag system e Remains on after the 6 to 8 second interval service If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced i
190. er setting This will insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com pressor damage when the system is started again STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS H Starting Procedures 544 sod erste nmn 239 Manual Transmission lues 239 Automatic Transmission 239 Normal Starting sese et 239 Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C auauua aaau 240 If Engine Fails To Start 0 240 After 5tar ng us dents Ree eS oh ern 242 Bl Engine Block Heater If Equipped 243 ll Manual Transmission If Equipped 243 6 Speed Manual Transmission Bl Automatic Transmission sess Shift Lock Manual Override If Equipped 248 Brake Transmission Interlock System 249 4 Speed Automatic Transmission 3 7L Engine 2 4s esi e ra Rd 249 5 Speed Automatic Transmission 40L Engine clam xem es 254 Gear Ranges eeg anit siap anga e ER t 255 236 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Bl Four Wheel Drive Operation 259 Mp 143 Single Speed Part Time Transfer Case If Equipped 259 Shifting Procedure Electronically Shifted Transfer Case 0000 261 Mp 140 Single Speed Full Time Transfer Case If Equipped 262 H On Road Driving Tips 0 262 Maine B
191. er sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for a extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open e Always run the climate control in panel or floor mode when driving with any windows open even if only slightly to help keep fresh air circulating inside ve hicle Otherwise poisonous gases could be drawn into the vehicle Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned on If the bulb is not lit during starting have it replaced If the light stays on or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE START
192. erate quickly then place the selector in P Park position forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift WARNING into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Never use P Park position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage en STARTING AND OPERATING 251 R Reverse Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop N Neutral Shift into N Neutral when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle NOTE Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with selector lever in N Neutral can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Section 5 and Towing a Disabled Vehicle in Section 6 of this manual D Drive For most city and highway driving 2 Second For moderate grades and to assist braking on dry pave ment or in mud and snow Begins at a stop in low gear with automatic upshift to 2nd gear Will not shift to 3rd 1 First For hard pulling at low speeds in mud sand snow or on steep grades Begins and stays in low gear with no upshift Provides engine compression braking at low speeds Overdrive Ope
193. erred from your cellular phone to the UConnect system without terminating the call To transfer an ongo ing call from your UConnect paired cellular phone to the UConnect system or vice versa press the Voice Recognition button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the UConnect System and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue tooth connection between a UConnect paired cellular phone and the UConnect system then follow the instruction described in your cellular phone user s manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 e The UConnect system will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the Voice Recognition button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or de lete a paired phone Select another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone with the UConnect system The phone must
194. ers and convertible child seats e The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System in this section e Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position WARNING e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing infant restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing infant restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag which may cause se vere or fatal injury to the infant 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE See Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child restraint Before buying any res
195. ery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 1 If the key fob is equipped with a screw remove the screw With the transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal S1182c72 Separating Transmitter Halves 2 Remove and replace the batteries Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To assemble the transmitter case snap the two halves together NOTE If the key fob is equipped with a screw reinstall and tighten the screw until snug General Information This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your Keyless Entry Transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak batteries in transmitter The expected life of the batteries is from one
196. essure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low tem perature effects The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recom mended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning has been illuminated the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extin guish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information For example your vehicle has a recommended cold parked for more than 3 hours placard of 33 psi 227 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi 193 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi 165 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi 193 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn
197. eys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the key is in the ignition sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key STEERING WHEEL LOCK IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering wheel lock manual transmission only This lock pre vents steering the vehicle without the ignition key If the steering wheel is moved a half turn in either direction and the key is not in the ignition the steering wheel will lock To Manually Lock the Steering Wheel With the engine running rotate the steering wheel 1 2 revolution from straight ahead position turn off the engine and remove the key Rotate the steering wheel slightly in both directions until the lock engages To Release the Steering Wheel Lock Insert the key in the ignition and turn the wheel slightly to the right or left to disengage the lock NOTE If you turned the wheel to the right to engage the lock you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to disengage it If you turned the wheel to the left to engage the lock turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it SENTRY KEY IF EQUIPPED The Sentry Key Immobilizer
198. f This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch located in the center stack lower switch bank When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESP except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESP function normally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would normally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESP on again momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation E ESP Off Switch NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESP OFF switch Once the 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M situation requiring ESP to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion ESP BAS Warning Lamp The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is combined with BAS The ESP BAS Warning Lamp and the ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warni
199. f gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a CHECK GASCAP message will be displayed in the EVIC Electronic Vehicle Information Center Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Section 4 of this manual Tighten the fuel filler cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly tightened Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII in Section 7 of this manual for more information CAUTION Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system en STARTING AND OPERATING 303 WARNING e Never add fuel when the engine is running e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel cap is removed or the tank filled VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration Regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or pillar This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and
200. f the person you want call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the UConnect phone book Refer to Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook to learn how to store a name in the phone book The UConnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to phone book is recommended when vehicle is not in motion Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and is recom mended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone book entry if desired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phone book entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 The UConnect system will allow you to enter up to 32 names
201. folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names nmm e Level 1 12 including a separator and a 3 character extension 216 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME m e Level 2 31 including a separator and a 3 character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Specifi cation Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song
202. g life and reduces emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his her gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu lated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance damage the emission control system ee STARTING AND OPERATING 299 An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your dealer for service assistance The use of fuel additives which are now being so
203. g as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision Latch Plate To Buckle A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is abdomen To remove slack in the lap portion pull up a comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too will withdraw any slack in the belt tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug qu 2 belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision WARNING A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdo men Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed Removing Slack From Belt 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 6 To release the b
204. ge to the converter and vehicle ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349 WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your ex haust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact any thing that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing Do not idle the engine for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating condi tions Do not allow vehicle to run out of fuel NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you 350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Crankcase Emission Control System Proper operation of this system depends on freedom from sticking or plugging
205. ged battery may freeze Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode The battery temperature must be brought up above freezing point before attempting jump start 6 Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 When removing the jumper cables reverse the above sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan 334 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES BEEN WARNING Any procedure other than above could result in 1 Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out the battery vent 2 Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion 3 Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or of immobilized vehicle TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use of safety chains is recom mended Attach towing device to main structural mem bers of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed Two Wheel Drive Vehicles Provided that the transmission is operable tow with the transmission in N Neutral and the ignition key in the OFF position along with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on the ground The speed must not exceed 30 mph 50 km h and the distance must not exceed 15 miles 25 km If the vehicle is to be t
206. gement may be delayed after restarting the engine if the key is not cycled to the LOCK position first P Park This gear position supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use P Park while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply parking brake first then place the selector in P Park position WARNING Never use P Park position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage 256 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of P Park or N Neutral if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal R Reverse Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop N Neutral Shift into N Neutral when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle NOTE Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with selector lever in N
207. gine oil from your vehicle Used oil indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change NOTE For best access to the oil filter a drive on hoist should be used instead of a chassis hoist 3 7L Only ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347 Engine Oil Filter Selection All of the manufacturer s engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace ment The quality of replacement filters varies consider ably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Drive Belts Check Condition and Tension Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic tensioner No belt tension adjustments are required However belt and belt tensioner condition should be inspected at the specified intervals and replaced if re quired See your authorized dealer for service At the mileage indicated in the appropriate Mainte nance Schedule all belts and tensioner should be checked for condition Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure Belts should be inspected for evidence of cuts cracks glazing or frayed cords and replaced if there is i
208. h a garage door opener or gate unplug the device to prevent possible damage to the garage door or gate motor Operation Press and hold the desired button on the Universal Transceiver until the garage door or other device begins to operate The light in the display shows that the signal is being transmitted The hand held transmitter may also be used at any time Reprogramming A Single Button 1 Press and hold the Universal Transceiver button to be reprogrammed Do not release until step 4 has been completed 2 When the indicator light begins to flash slowly after 20 seconds position the hand held transmitter one to three inches away from the button to be trained 3 Press and hold the hand held transmitter button 4 The Universal Transceiver indicator light will begin to flash first slowly then rapidly When the indicator lights begin to flash rapidly release both buttons Security If you sell your vehicle be sure to erase the frequencies To erase all of the previously trained frequencies hold down both outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference EN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operati
209. hat exceeds 12 volts Check the Battery Test Indicator if equipped If a light or bright colored dot is visible in the indicator if equipped DO NOT jump start the battery If the indicator if equipped is dark or shows a green dot proceed as follows 1 Wear eye protection and remove all metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets which might make an unintended electrical contact 2 Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but with out letting the vehicles touch Set the parking brake place the automatic transmission in PARK and turn the ignition OFF on both vehicles 3 Turn OFF heater radio and all unnecessary electrical loads EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 333 4 Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact on the engine WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharge battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode During cold weather when temperatures are below freezing point electrolyte in a dischar
210. have been previously paired to the UConnect system that you want to use it with e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e You can also press the Voice Recognition button anytime while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select e The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the UCon nect system will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 feet the vehicle Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e You can also press the Voice Recognition button anytime while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the UCon nect system Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two proce dures From outside the UConnect mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the Voice Recognition button for 5 seconds until
211. he concern you may contact the Manufacturer s Customer Center Any communication to the Manufacturer s Customer Center should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Dealership name e Vehicle identification number e Vehicle delivery date and mileage DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico 915 729 1248 or 729 1240 Outside Mexico 525 729 1248 or 729 1240 414 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDDITTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its Customer Center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for your vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex pected repairs after your manufacturer s new vehicle limited warranty expires The manufacturer stands be hind only the
212. hed Select Done to exit from the clock setting mode E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 221 SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satel lite Radio This service offers up to 100 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of SIRIUS audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will contact you to supply a welcome kit and to confirm subscription information including the set up of your on line listening account at no additional charge For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ENS SID The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Num ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio system To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With RSC Radios With the igniti
213. hen be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phone book entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phone book from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the Voice Recognition button while the UConnect system is playing the desired entry and say Delete After you enter the name the UConnect system will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete Note that only the phone book entry in the current language is deleted 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Delete All Entries in the UConnect Phonebook Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook After confirmation the phone book entries will be deleted Note that only the phone book in the current language is deleted List All Names in the UConnect Phonebook Press the Phone button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 e The UConnect system will play the names of all the phone book entries To call one of the names in the list press the Voice R
214. her than those approved by DaimlerChrysler Mopar e At no time should any supplemental restraint system SRS component or SRS related component or fas tener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler Mopar E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 WARNING Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the front passenger seat assembly its related compo nents or seat cover may inadvertently change the airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash This could result in death or serious injury to the front seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an acci dent A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards FMVSS If A Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy when the Occupant Restraint Control ORC Module detects a moderate to severe frontal collision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then to immediately deflate NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those yo
215. hese engines B c T15e CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil Road conditions as well as your kind of driving affect the interval at which your oil should be changed Check the following to determine if any apply to you e Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C e Stop and go driving e Extensive engine idling e Driving in dusty conditions e Short trip driving of less than 10 miles 16 2 km EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 345 e More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C e Taxi Police or delivery service commercial service e Trailer towing e If equipped for and operating with E 85 ethanol fuel If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil at every interval shown in schedule B of the Mainte nance Schedules section of this manual If none of these apply to you then change your engine oil at every interval shown on schedule A of the Main tenance Schedules section of this manual NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change in tervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection for all engines under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer tified and meet the requirements of
216. hone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals No P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive service manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations dia grams and charts e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations these practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and driveability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler group vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance pro cedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips E F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 417 Call Toll Free at e 1 800 890
217. hoose between subtitle OFF or ON Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues are played at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 199 Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to ON and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the menu button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the cus tomer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Radio Mode Press buttons to select AM or FM Modes SET Button Radio Mode To Set the Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the s
218. icator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature light is on safely pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle in neutral with the air conditioner turned off until the light turns off If the if the light remains on turn the engine off immediately and call for service 166 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Ses WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Section 7 of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 7 Speedometer Shows the vehicles speed 8 High Beam Indicator Light Indicates that headlights are on high beam 9 Security Alarm System Indicator Light If Equipped This light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is arming The light will flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set The security light will also come on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned on 10 Electronic Stability Program ES
219. iced as soon as possible Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit PIN This number is required for dealer replacement of keys Duplication of keys may be per formed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one which has never been programmed and needs to be cut 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE When having the Sentry Key System serviced bring all vehicle keys to the dealer Customer Key Programming You can program new keys to the system if you have two valid keys by doing the following 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition switch ON within 15 seconds After ten seconds a chime will sound and the Vehicle Theft Alarm Indicator Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key 4 I
220. ies are needed B142cddd For additional information on HomeLink call 1 800 355 3515 or on the internet at www homelink com WARNING A moving garage door can cause injury to people and pets in the path of the door People or pets could be seriously or fatally injured Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety stan dards This includes most garage door opener mod els manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features it could cause injury or death Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www homelink com for safety information or assistance 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Programming The Universal Transceiver WARNING For best results install a new battery in the hand held transmitter before programming If your garage door Your motorized door or gate will open and close opener located in the garage is equipped with an antenna while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do make sure that the antenna is hanging straight down not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate A moving door or gate can WARNING cause serious injury or death to people and pets or damage to objects Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a danger ous gas Do not run the vehicle s exhaust while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause seri
221. ies the following the MIL Malfunction Indicator Lamp is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD On Board Diagnostic system is ready for testing Normally the OBD system will be ready The OBD system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced if you recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement If the OBD system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 342 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 4 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start the engine This means th
222. ights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Off 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears Confirmation of Voice Commands If Equipped When ON is selected all voice commands from the UConnect system are confirmed To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Display Units of Measure in The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT b
223. ign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather procedures should be repeated After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up engine speeds can cause excessive exhaust tempera tures which can damage your vehicle Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the engine running WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death es STARTING AND OPERATING 243 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms engine coolant and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the WARNING vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied The parking brake should al ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline 6 Speed Manual Transmission Remember to disconnect the cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 volt AC electrical cord could cause electrocution Use the heater when temperatures below 0 F 18 C are expected to last for several days 244 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Follow the shift pattern on the gearshift knob WARNING N
224. ii tmiai e H10 9145 License Plate Light 0 0 168 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal 4057K ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 BULB REPLACEMENT Head Light 1 Open the hood 2 Reach behind the headlamp unit in the engine com partment to access the headlamp bulb lock ring 3 Firmly grasp the lock ring on the back of the headlamp unit housing 4 Rotate the lock ring on the back of the headlamp housing counter clockwise to unlock it CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 5 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb Left Front Turn Signal 1 Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right full right lock 2 Remove the door in the left wheel liner by twisting counter clockwise Access to the bulb can be gained through the wheel liner hole 3 Disconnect the electrical connector 4 Twist the bulb counter clockwise to remove Right Front Turn Signal 1 Open the hood 2 Reach behind the headlamp unit in the engine com partment to access the turn signal bulb 3 Twist the bulb counter clockwise to remove 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN 4 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the bulb Front Side Marker 1 Open the hood 2 Remove the grille assembly as follows a Remove eight fastene
225. ike uses rex wi eO dees 263 Bl Anti Lock Brake System 005 265 H Power Steering 4 4c cesses ciceowesucs 268 a lire Safety Information caes tt en 269 Tire Markings llle 269 Tire Identification Number TIN 272 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 274 Bl Tires General Information 278 Tire Pressure 4 23 p RS 278 Tire Inflation Pressures 279 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 281 Radial Ply Tires x cree RR ee ES 281 Tune Spinnihg eskeeeewrcoc Re ence es 281 Tread Wear Indicators lesen 282 Lite Of Tire suse sey RR ERES 283 Replacement Tires is sseeg ea paesani 283 Alignment And Balance 284 W Tire Chains useless 285 H Tire Rotation Recommendations 286 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 237 Wi Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS Carbon Monoxide Warnings 299 sabi M LE 287 E Adding Fuel nnne 300 Hase a a si naiga em Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap isses 300 DICH yee E EXUIDDESE acp did in Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 302 SESSION eee ia ie sq pede 299 MVehicle Loading 0 0 000 c eee eee 303 x E i Certification Label lisse cece eee 303 3 7L Engine If Equipped
226. ill take you back to the previous menu Pair Link UConnect System to a Cellular Phone To begin using your UConnect system you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your cellular phone owner s manual One of the following vehicle specific websites may also provide detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone that you have NOTE e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect The following are general phone to UConnect System pairing instructions e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit pin number which you will later need to enter into your cellular You can enter any four digit pin number You will not need to remember this pin number after the initial pairing process e For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the UConnect system a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name e You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between 1 and 7 1 being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnect system However at any given time only one cellula
227. in operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can either use the combined form voice command Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice com mands Phonebook and New Entry Please remem ber the UConnect system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to some one sitting eight feet away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree at the end of this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options are at any prompt say Help follow ing the beep The UConnect system will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the UConnect system from idle simply press the Phone button and follow audible prompts for directions All UConnect system sessions begin with a press of the Phone button on the radio control head 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system w
228. ining button check your garage door opener manual or call 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www homelink com 2 Press and hold the training button on the garage door opener head unit This will activate the training light NOTE After completing step 2 you have 30 seconds to start step 3 3 Return to the Universal Transceiver in the vehicle and firmly press and release the garage door button Press and release the button a second time to complete the training process Some garage door openers may require you to do this procedure a third time to complete the training Your garage door opener should now recognize your Universal Transceiver The remaining two buttons may now be programmed if this has not previously been done Refer to the Programming instructions You may use either your Universal Transceiver or your original hand held transmitter to open you garage door Canadian Programming Gate Programming Canadian frequency laws and the technology of some entry gates require you to press and release the hand held transmitter button every two seconds during pro gramming Continue to press and hold the Universal Transceiver button while you press and release the hand held trans mitter button until the frequency signal has been learned 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The Universal Transceiver light will flash slowly and then rapidly when the programming is successful NOTE When programming suc
229. inutes and the headlights and taillights will flash for an addi tional 15 minutes NOTE The Panic and Security alarms are quite different Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the Security modes to hear the differences in the horn In case one should go off in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it To Set the Alarm The alarm will set when you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to lock the doors and liftgate or when you use the power door lock switch while the door is open After all the doors are locked and closed the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal that the system is arming During this 16 second pre arm period opening any door or the liftgate will cancel the arming If the system successfully arms the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the alarm is set A manual lock of the doors either with the door lock plunger located on the inside of the doors or with the driver s door key lock cylinder will not set the alarm 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN To Disarm the System To disarm the system use the remote keyless entry transmitter Also using a valid sentry key and moving the ignition switch to the ON START position will disarm the system If something has triggered the system in your absen
230. ired if pre X viously replaced 4 0L Only Inspect the manual transmission fluid add as necessary 3 7L X Only Drain and refill the transfer case fluid X Flush and replace the engine coolant anti freeze if not done at X a SCHEDULE A 409 H Miles 132 000 138 000 144 000 150 000 t Kilometers 220 000 230 000 240 000 250 000 n Months 132 138 144 150 N Change the engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X 4 Rotate the tires X X X X C Inspect the engine air filter element and replace if nec X E essary S Inspect the PCV Valve and replace if necessary X C Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Only X B Inspect the brake linings X D Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed Not re X X U quired if previously replaced 3 7L Only E Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed Not re X S quired if previously replaced 4 0L Only 8 Inspect the manual transmission fluid add as necessary X 3 7L Only Inspect the transfer case fluid add as necessary X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 410 SCHEDULE A MSM Miles 132 000 138 000 144 000 150 000 Kilometers 220 000 230 000 240 000 250 000 Months 132 138 144 150 Flush and replace the engine coolant anti freeze if not X done at 120 000 miles 200 000 km Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a malfu
231. is not functioning and that service is required See your authorized dealer immedi ately With the ABS malfunctioning the BAS and ESP are also switched off Both malfunction indicator lights illu minate with the engine running If the charging voltage falls below 10 volts the malfunction indicator light illuminates and the ABS is switched off When the voltage is above this value again the malfunction indi cator light should go out and the ABS is operational If the malfunction indicator light stays illuminated have the system checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible 20 Front Fog Light Indicator Light If Equipped O This light shows when the fog lights are ON 21 Oil Pressure Warning Light zi This light indicates that the engine oil pressure has become too low For a bulb check this light will come on momentarily when the ignition is turned On If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible Immediate service should be obtained 22 Airbag Warning Light The indicator lights and remains lit for 6 to 8 e seconds when the ignition is first turned ON If the light does not come on when the ignition is first turned on or the light stays on or comes on while driving have the airbag system checked by an authorized dealer 23 Tachometer This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute rpm x 1000 E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 171 24 Transmissio
232. ish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is playing Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the Voice Recognition button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the UConnect system will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the Phone button to begin ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The UConnect system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cell phone the UConnect system will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using UConnect The status is given for roaming network signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnect system while dialing via the cell phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety m
233. l injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar bon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro tection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified DaimlerChrysler Dealership ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353 WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type NOTE Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short period of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the stee
234. l economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset e Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 183 and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value e When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position e Display Units of Measure in To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until US or METRIC appears
235. l penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle s engine the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight 344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on t
236. ld as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time 300 STARTING AND OPERATING ME the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex haust gases from entering the vehicle ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
237. le a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call while Current Call in Progress After the second call has ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 established press and hold the Phone button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the Phone button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The UConnect system will call the last number that was dialed on your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the UConnect system Call Continuation Call continuation is progression of a phone call on UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to off Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After ignition key is switched off a call can continue on the UConnect system either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dict
238. le can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera poorly The instability could cause an accident Al tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire ways use radial tires in sets of four Never combine dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading them with other types of tires mm and cold tire inflation pressures Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi Series polis lahat DOMUS mum load is dangerous The added strain on your Tire Spinning tires could cause them to fail You could have a When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not serious accident Don t drive a vehicle loaded to the spin your vehicle s wheels above 35 mph 55 km h maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h 282 STARTING AND OPERATING MEM WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 35 mph 55 km h when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what th
239. le for trailer towing all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid excessive clutch slippage Towing Tips Automatic Transmission The D range can be selected when towing However if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the 3 range should be selected NOTE Using the 3 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation See Schedule B in section 8 of this manual for transmission fluid change intervals NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing Towing Tips TOW HAUL If Equipped To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat ing press the TOW HAUL button when driving in hilly areas or shift the transmission to Drive position 2 on more severe grades Refer to Iransmission Shifting in this section Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Don t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency es STARTING
240. lease the FUNC TION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press of the remote keyless entry unlock button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When All Doors 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the remote keyless entry Lock button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock unlock feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF ap pears 190 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Ses Delay Turning Headlights Off When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headl
241. ler If there is a fault present in the OCS the Airbag Warning Light a red light located in the center of the instrument cluster directly in front of the driver will be turned on This indicates that you should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer The Airbag Warning Light is turned on whenever there is a fault that can affect the operation of the airbag system If there is a fault present in the OCS both the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light are illuminated to show that the passenger airbag is turned off until the fault is cleared If an object is lodged under the seat and interferes with operation of the weight sensors a fault will occur which turns on both the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light Once the lodged object is removed the fault will be automatically cleared after a short period of time The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on collision severity and occupant size The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 70 milliseconds
242. ler towing or fleet commercial service This maintenance is recommended by the manufac turer to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty tOff highway operation trailer towing taxi limousine bus snow plowing or other types of commercial service or prolonged operation with heavy loading especially in hot weather require front and rear axle service indicated with a t in Schedule B Perform these services if the vehicle is usually operated under these conditions a SCHEDULE A 403 Schedule A Miles 6 000 12 000 18 000 24 000 30 000 Kilometers 10 000 20 000 30 000 40 000 50 000 Months 6 12 18 24 30 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X Rotate the tires X X X X X Inspect the engine air filter element and replace X if necessary Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Only X Inspect the brake linings X Inspect the manual transmission fluid add as nec X essary 3 7L Only Inspect the transfer case fluid add as necessary X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 404 SCHEDULE A EE Miles 36 000 42 000 48 000 54 000 Kilometers 60 000 70 000 80 000 90 000 Months 36 42 48 54 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X Rotate the tires X X X X Inspect the brake linings X X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E
243. life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to 172 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more tire pressures is low The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 60 seconds when a system fault is detected The flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes or until the fault condition is removed and reset CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warnings have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system op eration or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style After market wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 26 OdometerlTrip Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage To toggle between the odometer and the trip odometer
244. lt replace if necessary 4 0L Only X id Inspect the brake linings X S Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed Not re X X 8 quired if previously replaced 3 7L Only Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed Not re X X quired if previously replaced 4 0L Only Flush and replace the engine coolant anti freeze if not X done at 60 months EN SCHEDULE A 407 Miles 84 000 90 000 96 000 102 000 Kilometers 140 000 150 000 160 000 170 000 Months 84 90 96 102 Inspect the manual transmission fluid add as necessary X 3 7L Only Inspect the transfer case fluid add as necessary X M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 408 SCHEDULE A NENNEN 102 000 miles 170 000 km Miles 108 000 114 000 120 000 126 000 Kilometers 180 000 190 000 200 000 210 000 Months 108 114 120 126 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X Rotate the tires X X X X Inspect the engine air filter element and replace if necessary X Inspect the PCV Valve and replace if necessary X Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Only X Inspect the brake linings X Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed Not required if pre X X viously replaced 3 7L Only Inspect the drive belt and replace as needed Not requ
245. ly be achieved un der specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra Load or Reinforced Tire Light Load Light Load Tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 273 EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location 2 digits L9 Code representing the tire
246. ments ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED The load carried on the roof when equipped with a luggage rack must not exceed 68 kg 150 Ibs and should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area The tie loops provided in the side rails can be used to help tie down cargo however crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack Tie loops should not be used on their own to attach luggage to the roof rack Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached NOTE Crossbars are offered by Mopar accessories External racks do not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure that the total occupant and luggage load inside the vehicle plus the load on the luggage rack do not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately Long loads which extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfboards should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Place a blanket or other protection between the surface of the roof and the load Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden
247. mes first and follow Schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 390 SCHEDULE B ME Miles 3 000 6 000 9 000 12 000 15 000 Kilometers 5 000 10 000 15 000 20000 25 000 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X replaced at 3 months Rotate the tires X X Inspect the engine air filter element replace if X necessary Inspect the brake linings X Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid X Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary X a SCHEDULE B 391 Miles 18 000 21 000 24 000 27 000 30 000 Kilometers 30 000 35 000 40 000 45000 50 000 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X replaced at 3 months Rotate the tires X X X Inspect the engine air filter element replace if X necessary Inspect the PCV Valve and replace if necessary X Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Only X Inspect the brake linings X Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid X Inspect the manual transmission fluid add as nec X essary 3 7L Only Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary X M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D
248. mis sion fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer s recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Fluid Level Check 42RLE 3 7L Engine Your vehicle is equipped with a capped dipstick tube it is sealed and should not be tampered with Your autho rized dealer has the proper tools to ensure that the fluid level is set properly 364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN Fluid Level Check W5A580 4 0L Engine Your vehicle is equipped with a capped dipstick tube it is sealed and should not be tampered with Your autho rized dealer has the proper tools to ensure that the fluid level is set properly Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks The use of transmission sealers should be avoided as they may adversely affect seals Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Manual Transmission The clutch hydraulic s
249. mp Rear Door Module Unlock Power Slid Green RR DOOR NODE ing Door Module j4 25 Amp Driver Door Node J13 60 Amp Ignition Off Draw Natural Yellow IOD Main J5 25 Amp Passenger Door Node J14 40 Amp EBL Rear Window Natural Green Defogger J6 40 Amp Anti Lock Brake Sys J15 30 Amp Rear Blower Green tem ABS Pump ESP Pink J7 30 Amp Anti Lock Brake Sys J17 40 Amp Starter Solenoid Pink tem ABS Valve ESP Green J8 40 Amp Power Memory Seat J18 20 Amp Powertrain Control Green If Equipped Yellow Module PCM Trans J9 40 Amp PZEV Motor Flex Range Green Fuel es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse J19 60 Amp Radiator Fan M5 25 Amp Inverter Yellow Natural J20 30 Amp Front Wiper LO HI M6 20 Amp Power Outlet 1 Rain Pink Yellow Sensor J21 20 Amp Front Rear Washer M7 20 Amp Power Outlet 2 Yellow Yellow BATT ACC SELECT J22 25 Amp Sunroof Module M8 20 Amp Front Heated Seat Natural Yellow M1 20 Amp Center High Mounted M9 20 Amp Rear Heated Seat If Yellow Stop Light CHMSL Yellow Equipped Brake Switch M2 20 Amp Trailer Lighting Yellow M3 20 Amp Frt Rear Axle Lockers Yellow M4 10 Amp Trailer Tow Red 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M MW SENSR Under hood Lamp UH LMP Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Ca
250. my Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consump tion 3 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredict able steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s side B pillar 811ad0d6 Tire Placard Location The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to 280 STARTING AND OPERATING ME check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped
251. n PSI kPA or BAR 81826bd7 If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash the CHECK TPM SYSTEM text message will not be present and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes NOTE Your vehicle is either equipped with the stan dard compact spare tire or an optional non matching full size spare tire Both of these spare tires do not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore they will not be monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS In the event that the non matching full size or compact spare tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire the next ignition key cycle will still show the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be ON a chime to sound and the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will still show the low tire pressure value flashing on the graphic display EN STARTING AND OPERATING 295 However driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM text message on the EVIC This text message will then be followed by a graphic display with in place of the flashing low pressure value For every subsequent key cycle the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will be ON a chime will sound a CHECK TPM SYS TEM text message will be displayed in the EVIC a
252. n Range Indicator The electronic gear selector display is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the position of the automatic transmission shift lever and the relation of each position to all other positions For a good signal the display will place a box around the selected transmission range PRND21 If the PRNDL displays only the char acters PRND21 no boxes have the system checked by an authorized dealer 25 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light If Equipped Each tire including the spare if provided l should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accord ingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a signifi cantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
253. n be illuminated at full brightness during the daytime This can be helpful when driving with your headlights on during the daytime such as in a parade or a funeral procession To activate this feature rotate the left stalk one detent lower than the dome light Multi Function Control Lever The multi function control lever controls the operation of the parking lights headlights headlight beam selection passing light fog lights instrument panel light dimming and turn signals Multifunction Control Lever 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Parking Lights Instrument Panel Lights and Headlights Turn the end of the multi function control lever to the first detent for parking lights and instrument panel lights Turn to the second detent for headlight operation Headlight Switch To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights rotate the center portion of the multi function control lever up or down NOTE If the driver s door is left open and the head lights or parking lights are left on the High Beam Indicator Light will flash and a chime will sound Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned off a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened Headlight Dimmer Switch Push the multi function control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever to wards you to switch the headlights back to low beam
254. n be turned on or off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Section 4 of this manual or see your authorized dealer Automatic Unlock on Exit Feature Only Available if Auto Lock is Enabled This feature will unlock all the doors when the driver s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped and in P Park or N Neutral Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Section 4 of this manual or see your authorized dealer Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and rotate to the lock or unlock position 7 Inserting Ignition Key ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock plunger up unlocked position roll down window and open the door with the outside door handle WINDOWS Power Windows The power window controls are located on the driver s door trim panel There is a single switch on the front passenger door rear doors which operates the front passenger rear passenger door windows The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACCESSORY position Power Window Switches The
255. n the TUNE control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE control knob again to save changes Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference 198 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS See Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If customer wishes to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the 4 digit country code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up and down to select the and then push to select Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose a default audio language effective only if language supported by disc If customer wishes to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the country code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up and down to select the and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose a default subtitle language effective only if language supported by disc If customer wishes to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the country code using the TUNE control knob to scroll up and down to select the and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to c
256. ncrease the risk of injury in collisions Seat Belt Pretensioners The driver and front passenger seat belts are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove any slack from the seat belt systems in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt must still be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Control ORC Module Like the front airbags the pretensioners are a single use item After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners they must be replaced Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle their seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96 ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 seconds or until the driver seat belt is bu
257. nction is observed or suspected Retain all re ceipts This maintenance is recommended by the manufac turer to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS H Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Vehicle 442a oboe wad ok ge eee LEES 412 Prepare For The Appointment 412 Prepare AList seen 412 Be Reasonable With Requests 412 H f You Need Assistance llli 412 ll Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 415 ll Mopar Parts Bl Reporting Safety Defects 040 415 In Canada 32 ceded beeen dees ad codes 415 Bl Publication Order Forms 416 ll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Quality Grades 00000 417 Treadwear leen 417 Traction Grades Temperature Grades 412 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you
258. nd the graphic display will have in place of a pressure value After the original road tire has been properly repaired and put back onto the vehicle in place of the non matching full size or compact spare tire the TPMS will update the graphic display on the EVIC with a new tire pressure value instead of and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will be OFF as long as none of the road tires are below the low pressure warning thresh old The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this infor mation General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses United States 00 000 KR5S120123 Canada s ers wee doo eae s 2671 S120123 2906 STARTING AND OPERATING Se FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3 7L Engine If Equipped The 3 7L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excel lent fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded regular sabe gasoline having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recom mended Under normal conditions the use of premium gasoline will n
259. ndication of damage which could result in belt failure Low gen erator belt tension can cause battery failure Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interfer ence between the belts and other engine components Spark Plugs Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor mance and emission control New plugs should be in stalled at the mileage specified in the appropriate main tenance chart The entire set should be replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark plug Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine compartment for spark plug information 348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M The catalytic convert The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel SAUTAN only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness ofthe Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your converter as an emission control device vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con the event of engine malfunction particularly involv verter will not require maintenance However it is im ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst ued operation of your vehicle with a severe damage malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible dama
260. nformation e Phone status idle voice mail roaming battery strength and signal strength in increments of 20 percent e Call status Incoming call connecting connected air time in minutes and seconds call ended call failed roaming and no phone connection e UConnect Active e Caller ID phone number display When the appropriate conditions exist and if supported by the cell phone the EVIC will display the following telephone symbols The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the signal strength of the UConnect phone The W number of horizontal bars increases as the Signal strength of the UConnect phone signal in Strength creases V Incom ing Call Analog Roam ing The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate an incoming call The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that the UConnect phone is currently in analog mode The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that the UConnect phone is currently roaming INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 187 The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that you have voice mail Voice Mail The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate a text message Text Message The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the EC battery strength of the UConnect phone Battery Strength 188 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS Se The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that EN a phone connection has been made Call in Progress The EVIC displays this symbol t
261. ng e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 205 LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after 5 seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for 3 seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for 3 seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack
262. ng Lamp comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected ESP BAS NOTE e The ESP TCS Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Warning Lamp come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP System will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED NOTE The HomeLink system will be disabled if the Vehicle Theft Alarm if equipped is in the Prearmed Armed or Alarming state The HomeLink system will only operate when the Vehicle Theft Alarm if equipped is in the Disarmed mode es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 The HomeLink Universal Transceiver replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that oper ate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates or home lighting It triggers these devices at the push of a button The Universal Transceiver operates off your vehicle s battery and charging system no batter
263. ng the system Voice Command Tree Main Menu Call Redial Enter Enter Name Number Number associated Number with entry is Dialed is dialed Last Number on Phone is redialed Towing Emergenc Assistance eraency UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 English Espanol Francais The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Phonebook See Phonebook Flowchart See Setup Flowchart B1340288 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name um a Enter Location Enter Number m eN New Entry Added Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Enter Name Enter Location Current Number ia played Enter New Number Entry is modified Phonebook Entries Listed one at a time Delete Enter Name ist Confirmation Enter Location Entry Daleted 2nd Confirmation Phonebook Cleared 51315204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Voice Tree Setup Confirmation Toggle New phone Select a language will English Espanol Confirmation Prompts temporarily Or Francais override onoff Say 4 digit Sys
264. nsert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound and the Vehicle Theft Alarm Indicator Light will stop flashing turn on again for 3 seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key has been programmed The Keyless Entry Transmitter will also be programmed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to a total of 8 keys If you do not have a programmed sentry key contact your dealer for details NOTE If a programmed key is lost see your dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the systems memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be repro grammed All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system monitors the vehicle doors liftgate and ignition for unauthorized operation When the alarm is activated the system provides both audible and visual signals The horn will sound repeatedly for three m
265. nt airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity and occupant size Also the front passenger airbag is certified to the Federal regulations that define Occupant Classification Refer to Occupant Classification System in this section 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se This vehicle is equipped with window bags to protect the WARNING driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a win dow They are located above the side windows Their Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG covers or attempt to manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are no longer functional These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are in flating Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the window bag The area where the window bag is located should remain free from any obstructions Do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for in stallation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason Do n
266. o indicate that the Connect phone is currently not available Phone Not Avail able Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set tings displays in the EVIC Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select one of five lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to select English Espanol or Francais Then as you con tinue the information will display in the selected lan guage NOTE The EVIC will not change the UConnect language selection Please refer to Language Selection in the HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect section of this manual for details Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 km h When ON is selected all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 189 To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit When ON is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P Park or N Neutral position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and re
267. of others ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 TCS Traction Control System This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the Partial Off mode Refer to ESP Electronic Stability Program in this section BAS Brake Assist System The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the anti lock brake system ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the
268. ol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited DTS DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems Inc SALES CODE RES AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 207 B18BfBf5 RES Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio 208 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOLUME control knob to turn the radio on Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn the radio off Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the S
269. old This is normal Manually shifting between 3 third gear and 4 fourth gear positions using the ERS shift control will demon strate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive NOTE If the vehicle has not been driven in several days the first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission This condition is normal and will not cause damage to the transmission The torque converter will refill within five seconds of shifting from Park into any other gear position FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION MP 143 Single Speed Part Time Transfer Case If Equipped Operating InformationlPrecautions This is an electric shift transfer case and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch Transfer Case Switch which is located on the center console 260 STARTING AND OPERATING ME This electronically shifted transfer case provides 2 mode positions 2 rear wheel drive high range 2WD and 4 wheel drive high range 4WD LOCK Transfer Case Switch The electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be driven in the 2 wheel drive position 2WD for normal street and highway conditions dry hard surfaced roads When additional traction is required the transfer case 4WD LOCK position can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rota
270. olonged driving with the Malfunction Indica tor Light on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be per formed If the Malfunction Indicator Light is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic con verter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged A loose fuel filler cap message will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341 cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states which have an I M Inspection and Maintenance requirement this check verif
271. on NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment HomeLink is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls Inc POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun 81925096 visors on the overhead console Power Sunroof Switch 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Never leave children in a vehicle with the keys in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow fingers or other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully then stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and r
272. on switch in the ON RUN or ACCESSORY position and the radio ON press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE control knob and the Sirius ID number will be displayed The Sirius ID number display will time out in 2 minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen 222 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME Selecting Satellite Mode RSC Radios Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna if equipped Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger lug gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions
273. ons for using as soon as possible Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base anhirgeze coolant antifreeze coolant products Do not use additional When adding antifreeze coolant a minimum solution of rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may 50 recommended Mopar Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year not be compatible with the antifreeze coolant and 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive may plug the radiator Technology or equivalent in water should be used Use This vehicle has not been designed for use with higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures Propylene Glycol based antifreeze coolant Use of below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Propylene Glycol base antifreeze coolant is not recommended 358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water antifreeze coolant solu tion The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing antifreeze coolant types will decrease the life of the antifreeze coolant and will require more frequent antifreeze coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent
274. ot cover or place items on the airbag covers NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior These items may cause serious injury during trim but they will open to allow airbag deployment inflation 81926898 Window Airbag Location en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 The front airbags have a multi stage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity Along with the seat belts front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bol sters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Window bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions NOTE The passenger front airbag may not deploy even when the driver front airbag has if the Occupant Classi fication System refer to Occupant Classification System in this section has determined the passenger seat is empty or is occupied by someone that is classified in the child size category This could be a child teenager or even a adult The window bag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side collisions In certain types of collisions both the front and side airbags may be triggered But even in collisions where the airbags de ploy you need the seat belts to keep you in the right posi
275. ot provide a benefit over high quality regular gasolines and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance 4 0L Engine If Equipped The 4 0L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfac tory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89 The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended Under normal conditions the use of premium gasoline will not provide a benefit over high quality regular and mid grade gaso lines and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before consid ering service for the vehicle EE STARTING AND OPERATING 297 Over 40 auto manufacturer s world wide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC to define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many ar
276. ot safe anchors for a child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or collision a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers WARNING The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in per sonal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits described on the label attached to the left door or left door center pillar Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to sway ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 e Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision WARNING To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts Cargo Load Floor If Equipped The panel in the load floor is reversible for added utility One side features a plastic lined tray which c
277. ould cause failure Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the appropriate Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for suggested service intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You wouldn t have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake and Power Steering System Hoses When servicing the vehicle for scheduled maintenance inspect surface of hoses for evidence of heat and me chanical damage Hard and brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasion and excessive swelling suggest deteriora tion of the rubber Particular attention should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are present NOTE Inspection of brake hoses should be done when ever the brake system is serviced and every engine oil change 7 362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN WARNING Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure You could have an accident If you see any signs of cracking scuffing or worn spots have the brake hoses replaced immediately Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level
278. owed more than 15 miles 25 km or faster than 30 mph it must be towed on a flatbed or with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground or with the front end raised and the rear wheels on a towing dolly NOTE Towing the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground at more than 30 mph 50 km h or for more than 15 miles 25 km can cause severe transmission damage Four Wheel Drive Vehicles The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl Engine Compartment 3 7L 0 338 Bl Engine Compartment 4 0L 339 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII 340 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 340 H Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs 122 russa ec Gad og septa ed eus 341 B Replacement Parts n a ih tre 342 E Dealer Service ouo recede ores 343 Bi Maintenance Procedures 055 343 Engine Oils sende niens Rp RE es 343 Drive Belts Check Condition And Tefnsior uer e EST ea is 347 SparkPl gs iue sends ended s Catalytic Converter i e rem Crankcase Emission Control System Fuel Filler ue saoot t cee ant Sones a oak Engine Air Cleaner Filter 350 Maintenance Free Battery
279. p Park Assist PRK Switch STP LP SW Red ASST Heater Venti Fuel Pump Rly Hi lation Air Condition Control ing Module HVAC M38 25 Amp Lock Unlock Motors MOD Headlamp Natural LOCK UNLOCK Wash HDLP WASH MTRS Compass COMPAS M35 10 Amp Heated Mirrors Red M36 20 Amp Power Outlet 3 Yellow BATT 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN CAUTION e When installing the Integrated Power Module cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module and possibly result in a electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly rated fuse contin ues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb No Dome Light 45 04 coo eg RR RR WL212 2 Liftgate Lamp rmm ee eee 567 Overhead Console Lights PLW214 2A Reading Light p Juseng ia paemani nekia WL212 2 LIGHT BULBS Outside Bulb No Headlight os rk EE WweWe P 9008 H13 Front Park Tum llle lees 3157AK Front Sidemarker 0 5 0 0 0000000000 168 Back Ups cca wie ieee ob he Gane ERE S 4057K Center High Mounted Stoplight 921 Fog Lamp 0 0 c a
280. pace between you and the door 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance in Section 9 of this manual ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 WARNING Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more e Occupant Restraint Control Module severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In e Airbag Warning Light some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags e Passenger Airbag Being too close to the steering wheel or instru e Side Curtain Airbags above Side Windows ment panel during airbag deployment could cause serious injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach e Steering Wheel and Column the steering wheel or instrument panel e Driver Airbag e Side Remote Acceleration Sensors e nstrument Panel The side curtain airbags need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in e Interconnecting Wiring the center of the seat e Knee Impact Bolsters e Front Acceleration Sensors 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M e Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner e Occupant Classification System OCS Front P
281. ploys and are otherwise unavail able NOTE e A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually in dicative of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment e Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor mance In addition to crash investigations initiated by DaimlerChrysler Corporation such investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers govern ment officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by DaimlerChrysler Corporation regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes ma
282. power window switches remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned off For vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC this feature is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Delay 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Power Off to Accessories Until Exit in Section 4 of this manual Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the keys in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the win dows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Auto Down The driver door power window switch and some model passenger door power window switches have an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automati cally To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch To stop the window from going all the way down during the auto down operation pull up on the switch briefly To open the window part way press to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop The power window switches remain active for 10 min utes after the ignition has been turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE START
283. press the Odometer Trip Odometer Button To reset the Trip Odometer press and hold the button while in trip mode until the Trip Odometer resets If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged GASCAP will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odom eter reset button to turn the GASCAP message off If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started U S federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven There fore if the odometer reading is changed during repair or replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage can be determined INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 173 27 Malfunction Indicator Light This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system C which monitors the emissions and engine control system If the vehicle is ready for emissions testing the light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on as a bulb check until the engine is started If the vehicle is not ready for emissions testing the light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on for 15 seconds then blink for 10 seconds and remain on until the vehicle is started If the bulb does not come on during starting
284. proximately 3 feet 1 meter They will turn off when the vehicle is turned off or when the headlights are switched on WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS CAUTION In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the park position before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Move the lever to the DELAY position then select the delay interval by turning the end of the lever The delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles to a cycle every second N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Windshield Wiper Operation Move the lever upward to the second detent for LO speed wiper operation or to the third detent for HI speed operation Windshield Wiper Washer Switch Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the lever toward you and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pulled while in the delay range the wiper will operate for two wipe cycles after the lever is released and then resume the intermit tent interval previously selected If the lever is pulled while in the OFF position the wipers will operate for as long as the lever is held plus two wipe cycles
285. r Death Do not use a 3 Prong Adaptor Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure CUP HOLDERS Front Cup Holders In the center console there are two cup holders for the front seat passengers NOTE The cup holder insert is removable from the console for cleaning 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The rear passengers have cup holders at the rear of the STORAGE canen oi Front Storage Compartment The front storage compartment located on the left side of the instrument panel can hold cell phones PDA s and other small items Rear Cup Holders Front Storage Compartment EN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 Console Storage Compartment The center console has a removable storage tray which To open press the latch and lift cover can hold cell phones PDA s and other small items Center Console Removable Storage Tray 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CARGO AREA FEATURES Cargo Light The cargo area light is activated by opening the liftgate opening any door or by rotating the dimmer control on the multi function control lever to the extreme top posi tion Cargo Tie Down Hooks The tie downs located on cargo area floor should be used to safely secure loads when vehicle is moving WARNING Cargo tie down hooks are n
286. r is not in the vehicle ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM The Anti Lock Brake System ABS is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss of braking effectiveness The Anti Lock Brake System conducts a low speed self test at about 12 mph 20 km h If you have your foot lightly on the brake while this test is occurring you may feel slight pedal movement The movement can be more apparent on ice and snow This is normal The Anti Lock Brake System pump motor runs during the self test at 12 mph 20 km h and during an ABS stop The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation which is normal 266 STARTING AND OPERATING MEM WARNING WARNING Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish e The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot pre their effectiveness and may lead to an accident vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition slow down or
287. r passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 E Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap Latch Plate 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click TU 7 A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as stron
288. r phone can be in use connected to your UConnect System The priority allows the UConnect system to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle the UConnect system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 System will prompt you to say the number you want call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The phone number that you enter must be of valid length and combination Based on the country in which the ve hicle was purchased the UConnect limits the user from dialing invalid combination of numbers For example in USA 234 567 890 is nine digits long which is not a valid USA phone number the closest valid phone number has ten digits The UConnect system will confirm the phone num ber and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Dial by Saying a Number Call by Saying a Name e Press the Phone button to begin e Press the Phone button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME System will prompt you to say the name o
289. r vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibil ity of the owner e If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc assure that such materials are well packaged and sealed e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches or chips as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 heavy soil use Mopar Wheel Cleaner or select a non abrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only Mo par cleaners are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped YES Essentials seats may be cleaned in the following manner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply
290. radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 203 e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a 3 character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a 3 character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times If a disc contain multi formats such as CD audio and mp3 wma tracks the radio will only play the mp3 wma tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as M
291. raint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time babies and children too Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck led up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a missile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap can become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 Infants and Child Restraints e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 Ibs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carri
292. ration The overdrive automatic transmission contains an elec tronically controlled fourth and fifth speed Overdrive The transmission will automatically shift from 3rd gear to Overdrive if the following conditions are present 252 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e the transmission selector is in D Drive e the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem perature e vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h e the TOW HAUL button has not been activated e transmission has reached normal operating tempera ture NOTE If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem peratures the transmission may not shift into Overdrive and will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature Normal operation will resume when the transmission fluid temperature has risen to a suitable level Refer also to the Note under torque converter clutch later in this section If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot the transmission will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature If the transmission temperature becomes hot enough the Transmission Temperature Warning Light may illuminate and the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive until the transmission cools down After cooldown the transmis sion will resume normal operation The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to Drive if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed at vehicle sp
293. re Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the up dated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information A low spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 60 seconds and an audible chime will sound when a system fault is detected The flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes without an audible chime until the fault condition no longer exists If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists NOTE Your vehicle is either equipped with the stan dard compact spare tire or an optional non matching full size spare tire Both of these spare tires do not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore they will not be monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS In the event that the non matching full size or compact spare tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire each ignition key cycle will still show the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be ON and a chime to sound After the original road tire has been properly repaired and put back onto the vehicle in place of the non matching full size or compact spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light will be
294. re to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for service 320 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EBENEN JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING Jack Location The scissor type jack and tire changing tools are located WARNING in the left rear trim panel behind the second row seat e Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Storage Location EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 327 m Spare Tire Stowage The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by means of a cable winch mechanism To remove or stow the spare use the jack handle to rotate the spare tire drive nut
295. ring system This noise should be considered normal and does not in any way damage the steering system Driveline And Steering Component Lubrication All driveline and steering components are sealed and do not require lubrication Driveshafts are not serviceable Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks doors tailgate and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the appli cation of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to insure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the fall and spring Apply a small 354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild non abrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
296. rning seess amasan se smsk Ses Back Up s scenes a aee d ede a ei Brake Assist Warning Brake Warning 428 INDEX BEEN Bulb Replacement 000 378 379 Cargo sai cedar deed ob e eb Ye P xr 150 Center Mounted Stop 04 381 Cre serosa ae ea bead ex qu ede aed 174 Daytime Running 0 000005 122 Dimmer Switch Headlight 120 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator ss seta ge ds ee eee need 132 166 Fog m 121 170 380 Hazard Warning Flasher 324 Headlight Switch sessicstsirsy eurini 120 Headlighis 4 e eere on oy he ee nade 379 Illuminated Entry 0 253 ibe ve eye 20 Instrument Cluster sess 120 164 InteriOt 344 aah e Rhe rb e te oa rs 119 Lights On Reminder less 120 Low Fuel 2z mr fS ER 164 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 173 Passing s eec oe e dedi ed ed er eis 121 Rear Servicing da erae Rope eal eS 381 Rear Tail 2234941 nate tea Sune eas 381 Seat Belt Reminder llus 165 Service sdb a eed ean er RE Ee 378 379 Side Marker llle 381 Traction Control 42s Rb EI e 132 Tum Signal sses see t n 121 379 381 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 164 Load Floor Cargo ee 151 Load N Go Sliding Cargo Floor liliis ss 153 Loading Vehicle sea 246 dou n ERR xeu 303 WARS 2 64 ide syed x beg Poem Ede edd dE 274 Locks oreo gees ue rae Gea PEN En a ae bI 27 Automatic Door
297. rs b Remove two screws from each headlamp c Remove two scrivets from the center of the grille d Remove one push pin from the top of each fender e Pull the grille assembly toward you to disconnect the grille clips to the fender and the headlamp ball studs to the front end module 3 Disconnect electrical connector 4 Turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove Front Fog Light Front Fascia Mounted 1 Reach between the front fascia and wheel liner from under the vehicle 2 Turn the front fog light bulb 1 4 turn counter clock wise to remove from housing 3 Disconnect the electrical connector and replace bulb CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol EE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal and Back Up Lights 1 Open the lift gate 2 Remove the two push pins 3 Pull lamp straight back and disconnect electrical con nection 4 Remove the two screws attaching the backplate to the lamp assembly 5 Pull the backplate straight back from the lamp hous ing 6 Disconnect the electrical connector 7 Remove the bulb from the backplate Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL 1 Remove the two screws securing the CHMSL 2 Disconnect the electrical connector and washer hose if equipped from CHMSL 3 Replace the CHMSL
298. rtridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M10 20Amp Ignition Off Draw M12 30Amp _ Amplifier AMP Yellow Vehicle Entertainment Green System IOD VES M13 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw Satellite Digital Audio Yellow Cabin Compartment Receiver SDARS Node IOD CCN DVD Hands Free Wireless Control Module HFM RA Module WCM SI DIO Antenna ANT REN Clock Module Universal Garage CLK MOD Multi Door Opener Function Control UGDO Vanity Switch MULTIFCTN Lamp VANITY LP SW M11 10 Amp Ignition Off Draw M14 20Amp Trailer Tow Export Red IOD HVAC ATC Yellow Only es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 Monitor TPM Glow Plug Module GLW PLG MOD Export Diesel Only Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M15 20 Amp COL MOD IR SNS M16 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Yellow Heater Ventilation Red Controller Occupant Air Conditioning Classification Module Automatic Tempera ORC OCM ture Control HVAC M17 15 Amp Left Tail License ATC Rear View Blue Park Lamp LI TAIL Mirror RR VW MIR LIC PRK LMP Cabin Compartment M18 15 Amp Right Tail Park Run Node CCN Transfer Blue Lamp RI TAIL Case Switch T CASE PRK RUN LMP SW RUN ST Multi M19 25 Amp Auto Shut Down Function Control Natural ASD 1 and 2 Switch MULTIFTCN M20 15 Amp Cabin Compartment SW Tire Pressure Blue Node
299. s free communication system dis plays If Equipped e Navigation system screens If Equipped e Audio mode display The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel Functions Navigation if equipped System Status Personal Settings and Telephone if equipped Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept a selection Also the FUNCTION SELECT but ton changes the current CD track being played if so equipped when the EVIC is in the Compass Temp Audio screen Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip Functions Navigation if equipped System Status Messages and Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features Press and release the MENU button and the mode displayed will change between Trip Press and release the COMPASS A TEMPERATURE button to display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC displays the following messages e Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime e Left Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e RKE Battery Low with a single chime INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONT
300. sc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE This Radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable com pact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 213 Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than an inch a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and can cause damage to th
301. se the rate of window fogging Summer Operation Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant during summer to provide proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection against overheating A 50 concentration is recommended Refer to Fluids and Genuine Parts in Section 7 for the proper coolant type When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic in hot weather especially when towing a trailer addi tional engine cooling may be required If this situation is encountered operate the transmission in a lower gear to increase engine RPM coolant flow and fan speed When stopped in heavy traffic it may be necessary to shift into N Neutral and depress the accelerator slightly for fast idle operation to increase coolant flow and fan speed Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an automatic recirculation system When the system senses a heavy load or high heat conditions it may use partial Recirculation A C mode to provide additional comfort Winter Operation When operating the system during the winter months make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of ice slush snow or other obstruc tions Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air condi tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blow
302. sed e The transmission is moved out of P Park The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of two times The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one failed start where the remote start sequence was initiated but the engine stopped cranking without starting After either of these conditions or if the Vehicle Theft Alarm is alarming or if the PANIC button was pressed the vehicle must be reset by inserting a valid key into the ignition and moving it to the RUN position then back to LOCK DOOR LOCKS The vacuum fluorescent VF display located in the odometer area displays the word door as an indication of a door ajar or door not completely closed When the vehicle is not moving and the door is ajar or not completely closed the VF display will show the word door If any other active warnings including GATE or GAS CAP are present they will be shown in the VF display and will also continue to cycle If the vehicle is moving 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se three single chimes will occur One chime for each complete display cycle three cycles total After this the display will continue to cycle only no chimes If the trip reset button is pressed while the VF warnings are being displayed the VF display will revert back to only displaying the odometer trip odometer mileage Manual Door Locks Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from inside the vehicle If the plunger is
303. sh on once and the horn will chirp once Sound Horn Unlock Press and release the Lock button on the transmitter to lock all doors and tailgate The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chip once to acknowledge the lock signal If desired the Sound Horn On Lock feature can be turned on or off by using the following procedure e On electronic vehicle information center EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Personal Settings in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC sec tion Section 4 of this manual e On non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the follow ing steps ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 1 Perform this operation while standing outside the vehicle 2 Press and hold the Lock button on a programmed i e functional key fob 3 Continue to hold the Lock button wait at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the PANIC button Release both buttons at the same time 4 To reactivate this feature repeat the above steps Flash Lights With Lock The Flash Lights With Lock feature can be turned on or off e On electronic vehicle information center EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Personal Settings in the EVIC section Section 4 of this manual e Onnon EVIC equipped vehicles perform the follow ing steps 1 Perform this operation while standing outside the vehicle 2 Press and hold the Unlock button on a programmed i e f
304. size 2 digits ABCD Code used by tire manufacturer 1 to 4 digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured 2 digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 274 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location a i NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL E TRO ir on either the face of the driver s door or the driver s side Sar AOUBINIES Rae RoE CER IEAMTS p pillar NEWER FAGEI XXX KG OH 2 us TIRE DN SPARE ORIGINAL TIRE SIZ i Ti25 70015 INFL pum 200kPa 29PSI 200kPa 20PS 420kPa 60PS SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Ci 4M1DOPER P 11b5ada Tire and Loading Information This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 the total weight your vehicle can carry 811ad0d6 Tire Placard Location ee STARTING AND OPERATING 275 3 the tire size designed for your vehicle 4 the cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and
305. ssures 1 0 eee eee 279 Jacking aae bue oe Ae ee ie DAE 326 Life of Tir s uu cde e Pe eae iras 283 Load Capacity ee sss 274 275 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 287 Quality Grading 00 0005 417 Radial scere bratara es baa eee eda ee ER 281 Replacement saga erat as a orie n a i 283 Rotatiotb ks ESCENAS tacsa bwah 286 Saleby cup deer erf qe er area es 76 269 SIZES d rud Wurde Card uw ied aem rdg WSS des 270 Spare Hite asacka deae dnd takat RU a s 327 SPINNING Lidia wee i gana deel Rea ne tes 281 Tread Wear Indicators 000 282 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 314 Torque Converter Clutch 0 254 258 TOWING ie buceo ee Pie eb Pee Rao e es 305 en INDEX 435 Disabled Vehicle 0 0 00 eee 334 Guilde seee bat me ead eee a pd Re 310 Recreational 0 0 0 eee ee ee 321 Weight see eR oie ee UER cis SES 310 Traction Control llle 129 169 Trailer Towing sesime rerent nnn Ea nn RAEk 305 Cooling System Tips 004 321 Hitches 4 seuee sens y qu a E E O a eas 310 Minimum Requirements 0 315 Trailer and Tongue Weight 314 WHINE ccc cre e e c eS Rete iid eed 318 Trailer Towing Guide 00040 310 Trailer Weight iiie r3 ee re iii ieri ES 310 Tiansaxie9 osa rut EE beu 247 Automate 203 245 5 225o44se400832468464 247 Operation sss sesam ae Red efron c ea go 247 Tran
306. ster Case u s scie eae HRS ee eee 3 ee 365 Idi EM TC Ae peeks aaa 384 Maintenance 0 0000 ee ee 365 Transmission Automatic Puid id aes eh a tah dude dnd 384 Maintenance eee 363 364 Manual Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 00 0005 134 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry Tread Wear Indicators Taip Conmpttet cscs doe Yun Ege E Eee Trip Odome ter ise rur Suet tes Trip Odometer Reset Button Turn Signals UConnect Hands Free Phone Uniform Tire Quality Grades 496 INDEX BEEN Universal Transmitter lessen 134 Upholstery Care iovis m I ustis 369 Utility Tabl e sisese eS RAS dom d ERROR RS eis 152 Vacuum Vapor Harnesses 0000 360 Vanity Mirrors 1 ee 84 Variance Compass secsec oae timetas at 177 184 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 8 Vehicle Loading ces ed wx 275 303 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 9 Vehicle Storage 2 9 e RR 233 Video Entertainment System Rear Seat Video System llus 225 Viscosity Engine Oil deer e Res 346 Warning Flasher Hazard 324 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 164 Warnings and Cautions 04 8 Warranty Information 5 415 Washer Adding Fluid 00 156 Washers Windshield
307. t to allow for Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in extended cargo space Pull up on the lever to fold down the event of impact from the rear Adjustable head the seat back restraints should be adjusted so that the upper edge is as high as practical The head restraints have a locking button that must be pushed inward to lower the head restraint The head restraints may be raised without pushing in the button Heated Seats If Equipped Heated seats provide comfort and warmth on cold days and can help soothe sore muscles and backs The heaters provide the same heat level for both cushion and back The front driver and passenger seats are heated The controls for each heater are located near the bottom center of the instrument panel After turning on the ignition you can choose from High Low or Off heat settings Amber LEDs in the top portion of each switch Fold Flat Passenger Seat 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME indicate the level of heat in use Two LEDs are illumi nated for high one for low and none for off Pressing the switch once will select high level heating Heated Seat Switches Pressing the switch a second time will select low level heating Pressing the switch a third time will shut the heating elements off When high temperature heating is selected the heaters provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation after heating is activated The heat o
308. tation will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice 200 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will be displayed Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to a authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum total of 5 times CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will
309. te at the same speed This is accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position refer to Shifting Procedure for specific shift ing instructions The 4WD LOCK position is designed for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4WD LOCK position on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline compo nents NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case ee STARTING AND OPERATING 261 Proper operation of 4 wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case Since 4 wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit Shifting Procedure Electronically Shifted Transfer Case NOTE If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met the transfer case will not shift The 4WD Indicator Light located in the display under the tachometer will flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met To retry a shift return the control knob back to the original position make certain all shift requirements have been met wait five 5 seconds and try the shift again 2WD amp 4WD LO
310. tem Lists phone All List Phones Priorities pin cade Phones Enter Name of phane and fallow prompts to complete pairing Select Phone Select phone to be deleted system System Lists Phone Deleted confirms Phones All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Bi5402e4 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Commands call Primary Alternate s cancel zero confirmation prompts one continue two delete three dial four edit five emergency Six English seven erase all eight Espanol nine Fancais star help plus home pound language add location list names all list phones EN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 record again redial return to main menu return or main menu select phone select send set up phone settings or phone set up mobile towing assistance mute transfer call mute off try again new entry voice training no work pager yes pair a phone phone pairing pairing phonebook phone book previous 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se SEATS Front Manual Seat Adjustment Move the seat forward or rearward using the adjustment bar Lift up on the bar located on the front of the seat near the floor Position
311. ten the nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered 8 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left and remove the jack and wheel blocks 9 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice Correct wheel nut tightness is 130 N m 95 ft Ibs If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 10 Lower the jack to it s fully closed position WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 11 Secure the tire jack and tools in their proper loca tions 332 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EBENEN JUMP STARTING WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or cloth ing Don t lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the con taminated area immediately with large quantities of water A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam mable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output t
312. ter cylinder and transmission and add as needed e Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the exhaust system Inspect brake hoses Inspect the CV joints If equipped and front suspen sion components Check the coolant level hoses and clamps After completion of off road operation the underside of the vehicle should be thoroughly inspected Exam ine threaded fasteners for looseness ee SCHEDULE B 389 Schedule B Follow this schedule if you usually operate your vehicle under one or more of the following conditions e Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C e Stop and go driving e Excessive engine idling Driving in dusty conditions e Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 2 km e More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C e Trailer towing e Taxi police or delivery service commercial service e Off road or desert driving e If equipped for and operated with E 85 ethanol fuel NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months whichever comes first and follow Schedule B of the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then flush and replace your engine coolant anti freeze every 102 000 miles 170 000 km or 60 months whichever co
313. the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items 224 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME e Display Sirius ID number Press the SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscrip tion SET Button To Set the Push Button Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second channel to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into push button memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be s
314. the retractor Allow the belt to return to the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint For additional information refer to Auto matic Locking Mode earlier in this section en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still cannot be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still cannot make the child restraint secure try a different seating position Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the manufacturer s instructions tell you When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seat backs and cause serious personal injury NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more th
315. the session begins or e Press the Voice Recognition button and say Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the UConnect system For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Recognition VR e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting approximately eight 8 feet away from you es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period e Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition e Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some e When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send e Storing names in phon
316. then turn OFF Mist Feature Push down on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle As long as the lever is held down the wipers will continue to operate 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To tilt the column push down on the lever under the multi function control lever and move the wheel up or Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is down as desired Pull the lever back upwards to lock the moving is dangerous Without a stable steering col column firmly in place umn you could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Adjust the column only while the ve hicle is stopped Be sure it is locked before driving Tilt Steering Column EN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged this device takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The speed control lever is located on the right side of the steering wheel 81862005 Speed Control Switch To Activate Push the ON OFF button The CRUISE indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system OFF push the ON OFF button a second time The CRUISE indicator will turn off The system should be turned OFF when not in use WARNING Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You
317. this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service also should be done any time a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sion control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part which has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES There are two maintenance schedules that show the required service for your vehicle First is Schedule B It is for vehicles that are operated under the conditions that are listed below and at the beginning of the schedule e Day or night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C e Stop and go driving e Excessive engine idling e Driving in dusty conditions e Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 2 km e More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C e Trailer towing e Taxi police or delivery service commercial service ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 387 e Off road or desert driving Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi tions Where time and mileage are listed follow the NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your ititerv
318. this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage will also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use Mopar Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly FUSES INTEGRATED POWER MODULE The Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM is located in the engine compartment near the battery This center contains cartridge fuses mini fuses and relays A label that identifies each component is printed on the inside of the cover Integrated Power Module TIPM 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse JA 40 Amp Power Folding Seat J10 30 Amp Hdlp Wash Relay Green Pink Manual Tuning Valve J2 30 Amp Transfer Case Pwr Ju 30 Amp Sway Bar Pink Liftgate Module Pink THATCHAM Lock J3 40 A
319. thod of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different than the speed recommended by the manufacturer Type S specifications NOTE Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain manufacturer 286 STARTING AND OPERATING MEM These cautions apply to all chain traction devices includ ing link and cable radial chains Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires NOTE The use of class S chains is permitted with P235 65R17 tires CAUTION Do not use tire chains on vehicles equipped with tires other than P235 65R17 tires There may not be adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking structural or body damage to your vehicle TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering handling and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and develop irregular wear patterns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On Off Road type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving found in the Maintenance Sch
320. tick ged cava soar o obs ERO ahd aval al ln Bore 256 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 144 Auxiliary Power Outlet 00040 144 Axle Huid dureh oA ee ed OR amp i ne ee 384 Battery ona cede oh epo REESE ERU RUE Ld 351 Charging a giant ate eo de uiid Taba esa 332 Emergency Starting 0000 332 Gas Caution 0 ee es 332 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 24 Belts Dtiv os ris Ra RR OE eR 347 Belts Seat suse eg PE Oey Ee Rae 38 Body Mechanism Lubrication 353 B Pillar L cati bv assa do RR nen 274 Brake Assist System 00000 e ee eee 129 Brake Control System Electronic 128 Brake Fluid ux hw aE ae RE 384 Brake System s s distance oaks aware red beens 361 Anti Lock ABS 00 00000 128 265 HOSES ober anra PERS ie ae mae Beas red ae s 361 Master Cylinder reor Rr xm 362 Parking cocoate dude Boe aia dhe aide teresa 263 Warning Light 0 00000 167 169 Brake Transmission Interlock 249 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 74 Bulb Replacement 00000050 379 Bulbs Light 2 2 2 eee eee gin RE cae 378 Calibration Compass 0000 178 184 Capacities FMI ssec pe tee os 382 Caps Filler lump eet geet Bs tna ene a wre TELE 300 Power Steering assa ese dde hod Re arat a 352 Car Washes 2 hobo de ea BPRS E UE DRE 367 Carbon Monoxide Warning 74 299
321. tion for the airbags to protect you properly Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to properly wear the vehicle seat belt should be secured in the rear seat in a child restraint or belt positioning booster seat Older 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint See Child Restraint in this section You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to inflate 4 Do not lean against the door or window airbags will inflate forcefully into the s
322. title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported ee INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 217 Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after 5 se
323. to the P Park position 3 Turn off the engine be sure to turn the key to the LOCK position 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds then restart the en gine 5 Move the shift lever to the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation If the problem persists P Park R Reverse and N Neutral will continue to operate Only Second gear range will operate in the D Drive shifter position Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle EE STARTING AND OPERATING 259 A clutch within the torque converter engages automati cally at a calibrated speed at light throttle It engages at higher speeds under heavier acceleration This may re sult in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops below a calibrated speed or during acceleration the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages The feature is operational in Overdrive and in Drive NOTE The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm usually after 1 3 miles 1 6 4 8 km of driving Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when c
324. to two years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a remote starting system which will allow the vehicle to be started up to 300 feet away from the vehicle using the remote keyless entry key fob which is part of your ignition key In order to remote start your vehicle the hood liftgate and all the doors must be closed To remote start your vehicle press the Remote Start button on the key fob twice within three seconds To indicate that the vehicle is about to start the parking lights will flash and the horn will sound briefly if programmed 8193fe7a E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 Once the vehicle has started the engine will run for 15 minutes To cancel remote start press the Remote Start button once To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a remote start you must first unlock the vehicle using the Unlock button on the key fob After the vehicle is unlocked you have 60 seconds to enter the vehicle insert the key in the ignition and move it to the RUN position otherwise the engine will cancel remote start and auto matically turn off Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur e If the engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500 e Any engine warning lamps come on e The hood is opened e The hazard switch is pres
325. ton until Calibrate Compass displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to start the calibration The message CAL will display in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and Geographic North In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings If this occurs the compass variance must be set using the following procedure INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 185 NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top of the right rear quarter window This is where the compass sensor is located 186 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS See 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press and hold the compass button for approximately 2 seconds 3 Press the SCROLL button until Compass Variance message and the last variance zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the compass button to exit Telephone If Equipped Press and release the MENU button until Telephone displays in the EVIC When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC pro vides the following telephone i
326. tor normally remains completely full so there is not need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for antifreeze coolant freeze point or replacing antifreeze coolant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional antifreeze coolant is needed to main tain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is normally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulat ing on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens allowing hot antifreeze coolant to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant bottle e Check antifreeze coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If antifreeze 360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN coolant needs to be added contents of coolant recov ery bottle must also be protected against freezing e If frequent antifreeze coolant additions are required or if the level in the recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks
327. trailer If the needle rises to the H mark stop the vehicle shift Fuller into N Neutral increase engine speed for 2 3 minutes If the temperature reading does not return to normal seek authorized service immediately CAUTION Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the engine running as you would not be able to react to the temperature indicator if the engine overheats The gauge pointer will remain near its last reading when the engine is turned off It will return to a true reading when the engine is restarted 4 Low Fuel Warning Light This indicator lights when the fuel gauge reads 1 8 of a tank or less E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 165 5 Seat Belt Reminder Light This light comes on for several seconds after the ignition is turned ON as a reminder to buckle up This light will remain on as long as the seat belt remains unbuckled If this light flashes it indicates a fault in the airbag system Have the system checked by an authorized dealer 6 Coolant Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condi tion For a bulb check this light will come on momentarily when the ignition is turned On If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle shift into N Neutral and increase the engine speed for 2 to 3 minutes If the temperature reading does not return to normal seek authorized service immediately Fuller As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H this ind
328. traint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards The manufacturer also recommends that you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it Except for the second row center seating position all passenger seat belts are equipped with automatic locking retractors identified by a distinctive label The second row center position has a cinching latch plate identified by a distinctive label Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt the cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight However any seat belt system may loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary For the second row seat belts with the automatic locking retractors pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is fully extracted from
329. trol buttons that will enable you to access the system Actual button location may vary with radio The individual buttons are de scribed in the Operations section PUSH CN ON 8196739 UConnect Buttons The UConnect system can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See www chrysler com uconnect for supported phones If your cellular phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any UCon nect features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The UConnect system is fully integrated with the vehicle s audio system The volume of the UConnect system can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 Operations Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect system and to navigate through the UConnect menu structure Voice commands are required after most UConnect system prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certa
330. tter refer to the Rolling Code Paragraph or call toll free for customer assistance at 1 800 355 3515 or on the internet at www homelink com Rolling Code Programming NOTE If your hand held transmitter appears to pro gram the Universal Transceiver but your garage door or other device does not operate and your device was manufactured after 1996 your garage door opener or other device may have a Rolling Code system On garage door openers with the Rolling Code feature the transmitter code changes after each use to prevent the copying of your code To check if your device is protected by a Rolling Code system e Check the owner s manual for the device for mention of Rolling Codes e Press and hold the programmed button on the Univer sal Transceiver If the Universal Transceiver indicator light flashes rapidly and then stays on after 2 seconds the device has the Rolling Code feature To train a garage door opener or other rolling code equipped devices with the rolling code feature follow these instructions after completing the Programming portion of this text N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 NOTE The assistance of a second person may make the following programming procedure quicker and easier 1 Locate the training button on the garage door motor head unit The exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener manufacturer If you have difficulty in locating the tra
331. u might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately e As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instruc tions for cleaning It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioner and seat belt retractor assem bly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Also have the Occupant Classification System serviced as well Enhanced Accident Response Feature If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical system remains functional vehicles equipped with pow
332. unctional key fob 3 Continue to hold the Unlock button wait at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the Lock button Release both buttons at the same time 4 To reactivate this feature repeat the above steps Using the Panic Alarm NOTE The Panic and Security alarms are quite different Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the Security modes to hear the differences in the 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se horn In case one should go off in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it To activate the Panic mode while the ignition is OFF press and release the PANIC button on the transmitter once When the Panic mode is activated the interior lights will illuminate the headlamps and parking lights will flash and the horn will sound To cancel the Panic mode press and release the PANIC button on the transmitter a second time Panic mode will automatically cancel after 3 minutes or if the vehicle is started or exceeds 5 mph 8 km h During the Panic Mode the door locks and remote keyless entry systems will function normally Panic mode will not disarm the security system on vehicles so equipped Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to SENTRY KEY Customer Key Programming in this section NOTE If you do not have a programmed transmitter contact your dealer for details Batt
333. urface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 228 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME 3 Do not apply paper paper CD labels or tape to the disc avoid scratching the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzine thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high CLIMATE CONTROLS Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System The controls for the heating air conditioning and venti lation system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary knobs These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions 81500557 Manual Air Conditioning and Heating Controls The instrument panel features four airflow registers Two registers are located on the outer ends of the instrument panel and two are located in the center of the instrument panel These registers can be fully closed to partially block airflow and they can be adjusted to direct airflow where the occupant desires E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 229 Blower Control 8191de0d Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The fan speed increases as you turn the outer control ring to the right from the OFF position Temperature Control 8191deig NOTE Use this control to regulate the temper
334. urned OFF and then to ON to restart the rear wiper NOTE The rear swing gate will lock while the rear wiper is operating The gate will stay locked until the wiper is turned off and the gate is unlocked by key lock switch or key fob Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared It is located in the front of the engine compartment and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with wind shield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and oper ate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water Rear Window Defroster If Equipped The push button is located on the bottom of the blower con trol knob Press this button to turn on the rear window de froster and the optional elec tric remote control heated mirrors An amber light shows that the defroster is on B182b 72e The defroster will automatically turn off after about ten minutes For five more minutes of operation press the switch again To prevent excessive battery drain use the defroster only when the engine is operating N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 CAUTION Use care when washing the inside of the rear win dow to prevent damage to heating elements Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Also keep all objects a safe distance from the window to prevent damaging the heating ele
335. ushing down on the seat will also be sensed The weight of an adult will cause the system to turn the airbag on In this case the OCS has classified the occupant of the seat as an adult An adult occupant needs to sit in a normal position with their feet on or near the floor in order to be properly classified Reclining the seat back too far may change how an occupant is classified by the OCS Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding in the front passenger seat If an adult occu pant s weight is transferred to another part of the vehicle like the door or instrument panel the weight sensors in the seat may not properly classify the occupant Objects lodged under the seat or between the seat and the center console can prevent the occupant s weight from being measured properly and may result in the occupant being improperly classified Ensure that the front passenger seat back does not touch anything placed on the back seat 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se because this can also affect occupant classification Also if you fold down the rear seat check to be sure it doesn t touch the front passenger seat If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way it should only be serviced by an authorized dealer If the seat is removed or even if the seat attachment bolts are loosened or tightened in any way take the vehicle to an authorized dea
336. utput then drops to the normal high temperature level If high level heating is selected the system will automati cally switch to the low level after 30 minutes of continu ous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change Operation on the low setting also turns off automatically after 30 minutes NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes E UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 The rear seatback also reclines for additional passenger comfort Pull the release strap while sitting in the rear Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin seat to recline the seatback because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat with Fold Flat Feature Rear Seat Release Strap To provide additional storage area each rear seat can be NOTE Prior to folding the rear seat it may be necessary folded flat to allow for extended cargo space and still to reposition the front seat to its mid track position maintain some rear seating room 116 UNDERSTA
337. utton until US or METRIC appears E INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS 191 RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Broadcast Signals Your new radio will provide excellent reception under most operating conditions Like any system however car radios have performance limitations due to mobile op eration and natural phenomena which might lead you to believe your sound system is malfunctioning To help you understand and save you concern about these ap parent malfunctions you must understand a point or two about the transmission and reception of radio sig nals Two Types of Signals There are two basic types of radio signals AM or Amplitude Modulation in which the transmitted sound causes the amplitude or height of the radio waves to vary and FM or Frequency Modulation in which the frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound Electrical Disturbances Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during transmission They mainly affect the wave amplitude and thus remain a part of the AM reception They interfere very little with the frequency variations that carry the FM signal AM Reception AM sound is based on wave amplitude so AM reception can be disrupted by such things as lightning power lines and neon signs FM Reception Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia tions interference that consists of amplitude variations can be filtered out leaving the reception relatively clear which
338. ver out of P Park or N Neutral if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal e Shift into P Park only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Shift into or out of R Reverse only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from R Reverse P Park or N Neutral into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal 248 STARTING AND OPERATING MEM Shift Lock Manual Override If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a shift lock manual override The manual override may be used in the event that the shift lever should fail to move from Park with the key in the ON position and the brake pedal depressed To operate the shift lock manual override perform the following steps 1 Firmly set the parking brake 2 Using a flat blade screwdriver carefully remove the shift lock manual override cover which is located on the PRNDL bezel 3 Depress and maintain firm pressure on the service brake pedal 4 Using the screwdriver reach into the manual override opening Press and hold the shift lo
339. vigation System assat daara saa 219 New Vehicle Break In Period 74 Occupant Restraints see ca x che eae he Seah Beans Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 430 INDEX BEEN Odometer Tip PC 174 Oil Engine s todas anti heen a ere te 343 383 Capacity savas ea dp enn bee eae 382 Dips ck as g0io eek na die oe whos 343 Filter m 346 383 Identification Logo 6 6 eee 345 Materials Added to 0000 346 Recommendation ss 345 382 burn C m 346 382 Onboard Diagnostic System 340 341 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 134 Outside Rearview Mirrors 82 Overdrive lees 171 251 257 Overdrive OFF Switch 251 257 Overheating Engine llle 165 325 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 416 Paint Care csse bg Godt RE ee dee 366 PaintbDam g a gi a aise asm de a a Raa kas 366 Panic Alarm a Det ad 26 69 4094 s de hh EE S 23 Parking Brake ss eret ER Red dens 263 Parking On Hill oss eee m me hm 263 Passing Light 0 0 0 0 ce eee eee 121 POV Valve ocean acceded eee ges an Ge baths 350 Personal Settings 5 5 sse Rr 188 Pets amp scoreline s Baas ev a A a Mak Ae ae a 73 Pets Transporting 6 6 eee eee eee 73 Phone Cellular esee 84 Phone Hands Free UConnect 84 Placard Tire and Loading Information 274 Polishing and Waxing 0
340. wer from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with Rear Power Outlet accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces sory bracket from the plug 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M POWER INVERTER Press the switch located in the center stack lower switch There is a 110 volt 150 watt inverter outlet located on bank to turn the power on to the outlet Press the switch the back of the center console to convert DC current to again to turn the power off AC current This outlet can be used to power small appliances and electronics ii Power Inverter Switch NOTE Due to build in overload protection the inverter Power Inverter will shut down if the power rating is exceeded N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 WARNING To Avoid Serious Injury o
341. which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function 206 INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS ME SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function PSCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will be displayed for 5 seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES9 Guide Dolby Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symb
342. y 004 21 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate 21 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate 22 Using The Panic Alarm 0 23 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Programming Additional Transmitters 24 Battery Replacement llle 24 General Information l l 25 ll Remote Starting System If Equipped 26 Mi Door Locks 0 cece ee 27 Manual Door Locks 000005 28 Power Door Locks leeren 29 Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors xui see S ac RIDERE ee ae 30 M Windows 00000 ee eee eee 31 Power Windows lees 31 Wind Bufteling cse cete roe re ee E ees 35 jEn7 PT n a oE RERNE EE ES 35 W Occupant Restraints o soana uaaa 36 Lap Shoulder Belts 0 0 38 Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 39 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 42 Automatic Locking Mode If Equipped 43 Energy Management Feature 43 Seat Belt Pretensioners 0 0 44 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert siner unie eter ie CORR ADR tad 44 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 45 Seat Belt Extender 00 0 46 Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS 00 0 47 Child
343. y be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the US govern ment and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver ve hicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler Corpora tion to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a DaimlerChrysler Corporation product 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data Parameters that May Be Recorded e Diagnostic trouble code s and warning lamp status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Airbag disable lamp status if equipped Time of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage Airbag deployment level if applicable Impact acceleration and angle Seat belt status Brake status service and parking brakes Accelerator status including vehicle speed Engine control status including engine speed Transmission gear selection Cruise control status Traction stability control status Tire pressure monitoring system status 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Child Rest
344. ystem is fed by a segregated volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder reservoir In the event of leakage or wear use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Manual Transmission Selection of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended manual trans mission fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more than 3 16 4 76 mm below the bottom of the hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level en MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365 Frequency of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary unless the lubricant has become contaminated with water If con taminated with water the fluid should be changed im mediately Transfer Case Fluid Level Check The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill hole A when the vehicle is in a level position Adding Fluid 7 Fluid should be added only at filler hole until fluid begins to run out of the hole Drain First remove fill plug B then drain plug C Recom mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 25 ft Ibs 20 34 N m 366 MAINTAININ

Dodge 2006 HB Durango Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents